Lexmark C746 User manual

Add to My manuals
274 Pages

advertisement

Lexmark C746 User manual | Manualzz

C746x and C748x

User's Guide

April 2012

Machine type(s):

5026

Model(s):

310, 330, 510, 530

www.lexmark.com

Contents

Contents

Safety information.....................................................................................11

Overview...................................................................................................13

Understanding this User’s Guide.............................................................................................................13

Finding information about the printer....................................................................................................13

Additional printer setup.............................................................................15

Installing internal options........................................................................................................................15

Available internal options .................................................................................................................................15

Accessing the system board..............................................................................................................................16

Installing a memory card ..................................................................................................................................18

Installing a flash memory or firmware card......................................................................................................20

Installing an Internal Solutions Port..................................................................................................................22

Installing a printer hard disk .............................................................................................................................26

Removing a printer hard disk............................................................................................................................30

Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................31

Order of installation..........................................................................................................................................31

Installing optional drawers ...............................................................................................................................32

Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................33

Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................34

Installing the printer software ..........................................................................................................................34

Updating available options in the printer driver ..............................................................................................34

Networking..............................................................................................................................................35

Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network.....................................................................................35

Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)...................................................................................36

Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh).................................................................................38

Installing the printer on a wired network .........................................................................................................40

Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port................................................42

Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................44

Using C746x................................................................................................45

Learning about the printer......................................................................................................................45

Selecting a location for the printer ...................................................................................................................45

Printer configurations .......................................................................................................................................46

Using the four-arrow-button printer control panel..........................................................................................47

Loading paper and specialty media.........................................................................................................48

Setting the paper size and type ........................................................................................................................48

Configuring Universal paper settings................................................................................................................48

Loading the standard or an optional 550

‑sheet tray........................................................................................49

2

Contents

Loading the optional 550

‑sheet special media tray..........................................................................................52

Loading the 2,000

‑sheet high‑capacity feeder .................................................................................................57

Loading the multipurpose feeder .....................................................................................................................60

Linking and unlinking trays ...............................................................................................................................63

Printing....................................................................................................................................................65

Printing a document .........................................................................................................................................65

Printing from a flash drive ................................................................................................................................67

Printing confidential and other held jobs .........................................................................................................68

Printing information pages ...............................................................................................................................70

Canceling a print job .........................................................................................................................................70

Managing your printer............................................................................................................................71

Finding advanced networking and administrator information.........................................................................71

Checking the virtual display ..............................................................................................................................71

Printing a menu settings page ..........................................................................................................................72

Printing a network setup page..........................................................................................................................72

Checking the status of parts and supplies ........................................................................................................72

Saving energy....................................................................................................................................................73

Restoring factory default settings.....................................................................................................................75

Securing the printer ..........................................................................................................................................76

Using C748x................................................................................................80

Learning about the printer......................................................................................................................80

Selecting a location for the printer ...................................................................................................................80

Printer configurations .......................................................................................................................................81

Using the touch

‑screen printer control panel ..................................................................................................82

Understanding the home screen ......................................................................................................................83

Using the touch-screen buttons .......................................................................................................................84

Setting up and using the home screen applications................................................................................86

Accessing the Embedded Web Server ..............................................................................................................86

Showing or hiding icons on the home screen ...................................................................................................87

Activating the home screen applications..........................................................................................................87

Exporting and importing a configuration..........................................................................................................89

Loading paper and specialty media.........................................................................................................90

Setting the paper size and type ........................................................................................................................90

Configuring Universal paper settings................................................................................................................90

Loading the standard or an optional 550

‑sheet tray........................................................................................91

Loading the optional 550

‑sheet special media tray..........................................................................................94

Loading the 2,000

‑sheet high‑capacity feeder .................................................................................................99

Loading the multipurpose feeder ...................................................................................................................102

Linking and unlinking trays .............................................................................................................................104

Printing..................................................................................................................................................106

Printing forms .................................................................................................................................................106

Printing a document .......................................................................................................................................106

3

Contents

Printing from a flash drive ..............................................................................................................................109

Printing confidential and other held jobs .......................................................................................................110

Printing information pages .............................................................................................................................112

Canceling a print job .......................................................................................................................................112

Managing your printer..........................................................................................................................113

Finding advanced networking and administrator information.......................................................................113

Checking the virtual display ............................................................................................................................113

Printing a menu settings page ........................................................................................................................114

Printing a network setup page........................................................................................................................114

Checking the status of parts and supplies ......................................................................................................114

Saving energy..................................................................................................................................................115

Restoring factory default settings...................................................................................................................118

Securing the printer ........................................................................................................................................118

Paper and specialty media guidelines.......................................................123

Using specialty media............................................................................................................................123

Tips on using letterhead .................................................................................................................................123

Tips on using transparencies ..........................................................................................................................123

Tips on using envelopes..................................................................................................................................124

Tips on using labels .........................................................................................................................................124

Tips on using card stock..................................................................................................................................125

Paper guidelines....................................................................................................................................125

Paper characteristics.......................................................................................................................................125

Unacceptable paper........................................................................................................................................126

Selecting paper ...............................................................................................................................................127

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead ....................................................................................................127

Using recycled paper and other office papers ................................................................................................127

Storing paper ..................................................................................................................................................128

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights...........................................................................................128

Supported paper sizes ....................................................................................................................................128

Supported paper types and weights...............................................................................................................130

Understanding printer menus...................................................................132

Menus list..............................................................................................................................................132

Supplies menu.......................................................................................................................................133

Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................135

Default Source menu ......................................................................................................................................135

Paper Size/Type menu ....................................................................................................................................135

Configure MP menu........................................................................................................................................138

Substitute Size menu ......................................................................................................................................139

Paper Texture menu .......................................................................................................................................139

Paper Weight menu ........................................................................................................................................141

Paper Loading menu .......................................................................................................................................142

4

Contents

Custom Types menu .......................................................................................................................................144

Custom Names menu .....................................................................................................................................144

Universal Setup menu.....................................................................................................................................145

Reports menu........................................................................................................................................145

Reports menu .................................................................................................................................................145

Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................146

Active NIC menu .............................................................................................................................................146

Standard Network or Network [x] menus.......................................................................................................146

Reports menu .................................................................................................................................................148

Network Card menu........................................................................................................................................148

TCP/IP menu ...................................................................................................................................................149

IPv6 menu .......................................................................................................................................................150

Wireless menu ................................................................................................................................................151

AppleTalk menu ..............................................................................................................................................151

Standard USB menu ........................................................................................................................................152

Parallel [x] menu .............................................................................................................................................153

Serial [x] menu ................................................................................................................................................155

SMTP Setup menu ..........................................................................................................................................158

Security menu.......................................................................................................................................159

Miscellaneous Security Settings menu ...........................................................................................................159

Confidential Print menu..................................................................................................................................160

Disk Wiping menu...........................................................................................................................................160

Security Audit Log menu.................................................................................................................................161

Set Date and Time menu ................................................................................................................................162

Settings menu........................................................................................................................................163

General Settings menu ...................................................................................................................................163

Flash Drive menu ............................................................................................................................................170

Setup menu.....................................................................................................................................................172

Finishing menu................................................................................................................................................174

Quality menu ..................................................................................................................................................175

Job Accounting menu .....................................................................................................................................178

Utilities menu..................................................................................................................................................180

XPS menu ........................................................................................................................................................181

PDF menu........................................................................................................................................................181

PostScript menu..............................................................................................................................................181

PCL Emul menu ...............................................................................................................................................182

HTML menu ....................................................................................................................................................184

Image menu ....................................................................................................................................................185

Help menu.............................................................................................................................................186

Saving money and the environment.........................................................187

Saving paper and toner.........................................................................................................................187

Using recycled paper ......................................................................................................................................187

5

Contents

Conserving supplies ........................................................................................................................................187

Recycling................................................................................................................................................188

Recycling Lexmark products ...........................................................................................................................188

Recycling Lexmark packaging..........................................................................................................................188

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling......................................................................................188

Maintaining the printer............................................................................189

Ordering parts and supplies..................................................................................................................189

Ordering a toner cartridge..............................................................................................................................189

Ordering a photoconductor ............................................................................................................................189

Ordering a fuser or a transfer module............................................................................................................190

Ordering a waste toner bottle ........................................................................................................................190

Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies...........................................................................................190

Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................191

Replacing parts and supplies.................................................................................................................191

Replacing a toner cartridge.............................................................................................................................191

Replacing the waste toner bottle ...................................................................................................................193

Replacing a photoconductor...........................................................................................................................194

Resetting the maintenance counter......................................................................................................197

Cleaning the the printer parts...............................................................................................................198

Cleaning the interior of the printer.................................................................................................................198

Cleaning the exterior of the printer................................................................................................................198

Cleaning the printhead lenses ........................................................................................................................198

Moving the printer................................................................................................................................200

Before moving the printer ..............................................................................................................................200

Moving the printer to another location..........................................................................................................200

Shipping the printer ........................................................................................................................................200

Clearing jams............................................................................................201

Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................201

Understanding jam numbers and locations..........................................................................................202

200–201 paper jams..............................................................................................................................203

202–203 paper jams..............................................................................................................................208

24x paper jam........................................................................................................................................212

250 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................213

Troubleshooting.......................................................................................214

Solving basic printer problems..............................................................................................................214

Understanding printer messages..........................................................................................................214

An error has occurred with the USB drive. Please remove and reinsert drive. ..............................................214

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] ..............................................................................................214

6

Contents 7

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]................................................................. 215

Change [paper source] to [custom string] ......................................................................................................215

Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation] .........................................................................215

Change [paper source] to [paper size]............................................................................................................215

Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation] ..............................................................................215

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] .......................................................................................216

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]..........................................................216

Close front door ..............................................................................................................................................216

Disk corrupted ................................................................................................................................................216

Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.....................................................................................................216

Disk problem...................................................................................................................................................216

Error reading USB drive. Remove USB. ...........................................................................................................217

Insert Tray [x]..................................................................................................................................................217

Install Tray [x] .................................................................................................................................................217

Load [paper source] with [custom type name]...............................................................................................217

Load [paper source] with [custom string].......................................................................................................217

Load [paper source] with [paper size] ............................................................................................................218

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] .......................................................................................218

Load manual feeder with [custom type name]...............................................................................................218

Load manual feeder with [custom string].......................................................................................................218

Load manual feeder with [paper size] ............................................................................................................219

Load manual feeder with [paper type] [paper size] .......................................................................................219

Paper changes needed....................................................................................................................................219

Remove packaging material, [area name] ......................................................................................................219

Remove paper from standard output bin.......................................................................................................219

Restore held jobs? ..........................................................................................................................................220

Some held jobs were not restored .................................................................................................................220

Supply needed to complete job......................................................................................................................220

Tray [x] paper size unsupported .....................................................................................................................220

Unsupported disk............................................................................................................................................220

31.xx Missing or defective [color] cartridge ...................................................................................................220

32.xx [Color] cartridge part number unsupported by device .........................................................................220

34 Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] .................................................................................................221

35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature ............................................................................221

36 Printer service required .............................................................................................................................221

37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation ................................................................221

37 Insufficient memory to collate job.............................................................................................................222

37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted..................................................................................222

37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored ........................................................................222

38 Memory full ...............................................................................................................................................222

39 Complex page, some data may not have printed ......................................................................................222

51 Defective flash detected ............................................................................................................................222

52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources..............................................................................223

53 Unformatted flash detected ......................................................................................................................223

54 Network [x] software error ........................................................................................................................223

Contents 8

54 Serial option [x] error.................................................................................................................................223

54 Standard network software error ..............................................................................................................223

55 Unsupported option in slot [x]...................................................................................................................224

56 Parallel port [x] disabled ............................................................................................................................224

56 Serial port [x] disabled ...............................................................................................................................224

56 Standard USB port disabled .......................................................................................................................224

56 USB port [x] disabled .................................................................................................................................224

57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored ........................................................................225

58 Input config error.......................................................................................................................................225

58 Too many disks installed ............................................................................................................................225

58 Too many flash options installed ...............................................................................................................225

58 Too many trays attached ...........................................................................................................................226

59 Incompatible tray [x]..................................................................................................................................226

61 Remove defective disk ...............................................................................................................................226

62 Disk full ......................................................................................................................................................226

80.xx Fuser near life warning..........................................................................................................................226

80.xx Fuser life warning ..................................................................................................................................227

80.xx Replace fuser .........................................................................................................................................227

80.xx Fuser missing .........................................................................................................................................227

82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full ...............................................................................................................227

82.xx Replace waste toner bottle ...................................................................................................................227

82.xx Waste toner bottle missing ...................................................................................................................227

83.xx Transfer module life warning ................................................................................................................228

83.xx Transfer module missing .......................................................................................................................228

83.xx Replace transfer module .......................................................................................................................228

83.xx Transfer module near life warning ........................................................................................................228

84.xx [Color] photoconductor nearly low .......................................................................................................228

84.xx [Color] photoconductor low ..................................................................................................................228

84.xx Replace [color] photoconductor............................................................................................................229

84.xx [Color] photoconductor missing............................................................................................................229

88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low ...................................................................................................................229

88.xx [color] cartridge low ..............................................................................................................................229

88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low ...............................................................................................................230

88.xx [Color] cartridge very low......................................................................................................................230

Solving printing problems.....................................................................................................................230

Confidential and other held jobs do not print ................................................................................................230

Error message about reading USB drive appears ...........................................................................................230

Incorrect characters print ...............................................................................................................................231

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper..................................................................................231

Large jobs do not collate.................................................................................................................................231

Multiple

‑language PDF files do not print........................................................................................................231

Print jobs do not print.....................................................................................................................................232

Print job takes longer than expected..............................................................................................................233

Printing slows down........................................................................................................................................233

Printer display is blank....................................................................................................................................233

Contents 9

Tray linking does not work..............................................................................................................................234

Unexpected page breaks ................................................................................................................................234

Solving home screen applications problems.........................................................................................234

An application error has occurred ..................................................................................................................234

Solving option problems........................................................................................................................235

2,000-sheet drawer problems ........................................................................................................................235

Cannot detect flash memory card ..................................................................................................................235

Cannot detect printer hard disk......................................................................................................................235

Internal print server does not operate correctly ............................................................................................235

Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly ........................................................................................236

Memory card ..................................................................................................................................................236

Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed ......................................................................236

Paper tray problems .......................................................................................................................................237

USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly .................................................................................237

Solving paper feed problems.................................................................................................................237

Paper frequently jams.....................................................................................................................................237

Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared ...........................................................................................238

Jammed pages are not reprinted....................................................................................................................238

Solving print quality problems..............................................................................................................239

Characters have jagged or uneven edges .......................................................................................................239

Clipped images................................................................................................................................................239

Gray background on prints .............................................................................................................................239

Incorrect margins............................................................................................................................................240

Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints .................................................. 240

Paper curl........................................................................................................................................................241

Print irregularities ...........................................................................................................................................241

Print is too dark ..............................................................................................................................................242

Print is too light...............................................................................................................................................243

Printer is printing blank pages ........................................................................................................................244

Repeating defects appear on prints................................................................................................................245

Shadow images appear on prints ...................................................................................................................245

Skewed print...................................................................................................................................................246

Solid color or black pages appear on prints....................................................................................................246

Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints.....................................................................................................247

Streaked vertical lines appear on prints .........................................................................................................248

Toner fog or background shading appears on the page .................................................................................248

Toner rubs off .................................................................................................................................................249

Toner specks ...................................................................................................................................................250

Transparency print quality is poor..................................................................................................................250

Uneven print density ......................................................................................................................................251

Solving color quality problems..............................................................................................................251

FAQ about color printing ................................................................................................................................251

Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................254

Contents 10

Check the network connection.......................................................................................................................254

Check the address entered in the Web browser ............................................................................................254

Temporarily disable Web proxy servers .........................................................................................................254

Contacting customer support................................................................................................................254

Notices.....................................................................................................255

Product information..............................................................................................................................255

Edition notice........................................................................................................................................255

Power consumption..............................................................................................................................260

Index........................................................................................................267

Safety information 11

Safety information

Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.

Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.

You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:

Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.

Lift the printer off the optional drawer, and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time.

Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.

Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce risk of fire, use only the telecommunications (RJ

‑11) cord provided with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.

This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.

Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.

Safety information 12

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the interior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Overview 13

Overview

Understanding this User’s Guide

This User’s Guide provides general and specific information on using the printer models that appear on the cover page.

The chapters cover setting up the printer and then understanding the parts of each printer model. Additional information is provided in several sections in this document.

Finding information about the printer

What are you looking for?

Initial setup instructions:

Connecting the printer

Installing the printer software

Find it here

Setup documentation—The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:

Selecting and storing paper and specialty media

Loading paper

Configuring printer settings

Viewing and printing documents and photos

Setting up and using the printer software

Configuring the printer on a network (depending on your printer model)

Caring for and maintaining the printer

Troubleshooting and solving problems

User's Guide—The User's Guide is available on the

Software and Documentation CD.

For updates, check our Web site at

http://support.lexmark.com.

Instructions for:

Installing the printer using Guided or Advanced wireless setup

Connecting the printer to an Ethernet or a wireless network

Troubleshooting printer connection problems

Networking Guide—Open the Software and

Documentation CD, and then look for Printer and

Software Documentation under the Pubs folder. From the list of publications, click the Networking Guide link.

Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program or application, and then click Help.

Click

?

to view context

‑sensitive information.

Notes:

Help is automatically installed with the printer software.

The printer software is located in the printer program folder or on the desktop, depending on your operating system.

Overview

What are you looking for?

Latest supplemental information, updates, and customer support:

Documentation

Driver downloads

Live chat support

E

‑mail support

Voice support

Warranty information

14

Find it here

Lexmark Support Web site—

http://support.lexmark.com

Note: Select your country or region, and then select your product to view the appropriate support site.

Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the Support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer.

Record the following information (located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready when you contact customer support so that they may serve you faster:

Machine Type number

Serial number

Date purchased

Store where purchased

Warranty information varies by country or region:

In the US—See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer, or at

http://support.lexmark.com.

In other countries and regions—See the printed warranty that came with your printer.

Additional printer setup

Additional printer setup

Installing internal options

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Available internal options

Memory cards

Printer memory

Flash memory

Fonts

Firmware cards

Bar Code

IPDS

PrintCryption

TM

Printer hard disk

Lexmark

TM

Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)

RS

‑232‑C Serial ISP

Parallel 1284

‑B ISP

MarkNet

TM

N8250 802.11 b/g/n Wireless ISP

MarkNet N8130 10/100 Fiber ISP

MarkNet N8120 10/100/1000 Ethernet ISP

Note: An external kit is needed to support the ISP.

15

Additional printer setup 16

Accessing the system board

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

1

Remove the system board cover.

a

Turn the screws on the cover counterclockwise to loosen them, but do not remove them. Pull the standard tray to access the two bottom screws.

b

Slide the cover slightly up until each screw is in the keyhole.

Additional printer setup 17

c

Pull the cover to remove it.

2

Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.

Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.

Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

1

5 4

2

3

1

Firmware and flash memory card connectors

2

Printer hard disk connector

3

Internal print server connector

4

Memory card connector

5

Dust cover

3

Reattach the system board cover.

Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.

Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

Additional printer setup

a

Align the keyholes with the screws.

b

Slide the cover down, and then turn each screw clockwise to tighten.

18

Installing a memory card

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

Additional printer setup

An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board.

1

Access the system board.

For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 16.

Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

2

Unpack the memory card.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may cause damage.

3

Open the memory card connector latches.

19

4

Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.

2

1

Additional printer setup 20

5

Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place, and then push the latches to firmly attach the card into the connector.

2

1

2

6

Reattach the system board cover.

Installing a flash memory or firmware card

The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card. Only one of each may be installed, but the connectors are interchangeable.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

1

Access the system board.

For more information, see“Accessing the system board” on page 16.

2

Unpack the card.

Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.

3

Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the system board.

1

2

Additional printer setup

4

Push the card firmly into place.

21

Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to damage the connectors.

Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.

5

Reattach the system board cover.

Note: When the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options

in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 34.

Additional printer setup

Installing an Internal Solutions Port

The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

1

Access the system board.

For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 16.

Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

2

Unpack the ISP kit.

1

22

1

ISP solution

2

Screws for the ISP solution

3

Screw for the plastic bracket

4

Plastic bracket

4

3

2

Additional printer setup

3

Locate the appropriate holes on the system board where the posts of the plastic tee will be aligned.

23

Note: If an optional printer hard disk is currently installed, then remove it first. For more information, see

“Removing a printer hard disk” on page 30.

4

Remove the screws, and then remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.

1

2

Additional printer setup 24

5

Attach the ISP solution to the system board.

a

Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes on the system board.

b

Hold the edges of the ISP and guide it to the opening on the system board cage, and then gently allow it to rest on the plastic tee.

c

Use the provided screw to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP solution.

Additional printer setup

6

Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the color

‑coded receptacle on the system board.

25

7

Firmly connect the ISP solution to the system board cage using the two screws.

8

Reattach the system board cover.

Note: If you have removed an optional printer hard disk while installing the Internal Solutions Port, then reinstall the printer hard disk first before reattaching the system board cover. For more information, see

“Installing a printer hard disk” on page 26.

Additional printer setup

Installing a printer hard disk

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

1

Access the system board.

For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 16.

Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

2

Unpack the printer hard disk.

3

Locate the appropriate holes on the system board where the posts of the plastic tee will be aligned.

26

Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.

To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP: a

Using a flathead screwdriver, loosen the screws.

b

Remove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket, and then remove the bracket.

Additional printer setup 27

c

Install the printer hard disk onto the ISP:

1

Hold the edges of the printed circuit board assembly, and then align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP.

2

Press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not press on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage to the hard disk.

d

Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.

Note: The plugs and receptacles are color

‑coded.

Additional printer setup

To install a printer hard disk directly on the system board: a

Hold the edges of the printed circuit board assembly, and then align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the system board. Press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not press on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage to the hard disk.

28

b

Use the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket.

c

Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.

Note: The plugs and receptacles are color

‑coded.

Additional printer setup

4

Reattach the system board cover.

29

Additional printer setup 30

Removing a printer hard disk

Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

1

Access the system board.

For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 16.

Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

2

Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board, leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out.

3

Remove the screws that connect the printer hard disk to the system board cage.

Additional printer setup

4

Remove the printer hard disk by pulling it upward to unseat the standoffs.

31

5

Set the printer hard disk aside.

6

Reattach the system board cover.

Installing hardware options

Order of installation

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb), and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Install the printer and any optional drawers in the following order:

Optional 2,000

‑sheet high‑capacity feeder

Optional 550-sheet drawer

Optional 550-sheet specialty media drawer

Printer

For information on installing an optional drawer, see the setup documentation that came with the option.

Warning—Potential Damage: The trays in the optional 550-sheet drawer and the optional 550-sheet specialty media drawer are not interchangeable.

Additional printer setup 32

Installing optional drawers

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

1

Unpack the optional drawer, and then remove all packing material.

Note: Optional drawers lock together when stacked. Remove stacked drawers one at a time from the top to the bottom.

2

Place the drawer near the printer.

3

Turn off the printer.

4

Align the printer with the drawer, and then lower the printer into place.

1

2

3

1

Optional 550

‑sheet specialty media drawer

2

Optional 550

‑sheet drawer

Additional printer setup

3

Optional 2,000

‑sheet high‑capacity feeder

5

Turn the printer back on.

Attaching cables

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as a power cord, a fax feature, or USB cable, during a lightning storm.

Connect the printer to the computer using a USB or Ethernet cable.

Make sure to match the following:

The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer

The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown while actively printing. A loss of data or a malfunction can occur.

1

2

33

1

USB port

2

Ethernet port

Additional printer setup 34

Setting up the printer software

Installing the printer software

Note: If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall the current software first.

For Windows users

1

Close all open software programs.

2

Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

If the installation dialog screen does not appear after a minute, then launch the CD manually:

a

Click , or click Start and then click Run.

b

In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

c

Press Enter, or click OK.

3

Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

For Macintosh users

1

Close all open applications.

2

Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

If the installation dialog does not appear after a minute, then click the CD icon on the desktop.

3

Double-click the software installer package, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Note: To take advantage of the full features of your printer, select the custom install option, and then select all packages listed.

Using the Internet

1

Go to the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

2

Navigate to:

SUPPORT & DOWNLOADS > select your printer > select your operating system

3

Download the printer driver, and then install the printer software.

Updating available options in the printer driver

When the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs.

For Windows users

1

Open the printers folder:

a

Click , or click Start and then click Run.

b

In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.

Additional printer setup

c

Press Enter, or click OK.

2

Select the printer.

3

Right

‑click the printer, and then select Properties.

4

Click the Configuration tab.

5

Click Update Now

Ask Printer or manually add any installed hardware options under Configuration Options.

6

Click Apply.

For Macintosh users

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

1

From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver

2

Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.

In Mac OS X version 10.4

1

From the Finder, navigate to:

Go > Applications > Utilities

2

Double

‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.

3

Select the printer.

4

From the Printers menu, choose Show Info.

5

Add any installed hardware options, and then click Apply Changes.

Networking

Note: A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wireless Encryption Protocol (WEP),

Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), and WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) are types of security used on a network.

Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network

Note: Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.

Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:

SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.

Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc.

Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.

Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select.

35

Additional printer setup 36

Security Method—There are three basic options for Security Method:

WEP key

If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.

or

WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase

WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network.

No security

If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.

Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.

If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network using the advanced method, then you may need the following:

Authentication type

Inner authentication type

802.1X user name and password

Certificates

Note: For more information on configuring 802.1X security, see the Networking Guide on the Software and

Documentation CD.

Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)

Before installing the printer on a wireless network, make sure:

Your wireless network is set up and working properly.

The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.

1

Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn the printer on.

2

1

Additional printer setup

Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready.

Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the computer screen.

2

Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

37

3

Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

4

Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type.

5

From the Wireless Configuration dialog, select Guided Setup (Recommended).

Note: Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation.

6

Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.

Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so you can print wirelessly.

7

Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Note: For more information on allowing other computers on the network to use the wireless printer, see the

Networking Guide.

Additional printer setup 38

Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)

Note: Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable when installing the printer on a wireless network.

Prepare to configure the printer

1

Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn the printer on.

2

1

2

Locate the printer MAC address.

a

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Reports > > Network Setup Page >

or

> Reports > Network Setup Page

b

In the Standard Network Card section, look for UAA (MAC).

Note: You will need this information later.

Enter the printer information

1

Access the AirPort options:

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Network > AirPort

In Mac OS X version 10.4

From the Finder, navigate to:

Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort

2

From the Network Name pop

‑up menu, select print server [yyyyyy], where the y's are the last six digits of the MAC address located on the MAC address sheet.

3

Open a Web browser.

4

From the Bookmarks menu, select Show or Show All Bookmarks.

Additional printer setup 39

5

Under COLLECTIONS, select Bonjour or Rendezvous, and then double

‑click the printer name.

Note: The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10.2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc.

6

From the Embedded Web Server, navigate to where the wireless settings information are stored.

Configure the printer for wireless access

1

Type the network name (SSID) in the appropriate field.

2

Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode setting if you are using an access point (wireless router).

3

Select the type of security you want to use to protect the wireless network.

4

Enter the security information necessary for the printer to connect to the wireless network.

5

Click Submit.

6

Open the AirPort application on the computer:

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Network > AirPort

In Mac OS X version 10.4

From the Finder, navigate to:

Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort

7

From the Network pop

‑up menu, select the name of the wireless network.

Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly

To print on a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom printer driver file and create a print queue in the Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.

1

Install a printer driver file on the computer:

a

Insert the Software and Documentation CD, and then double

‑click the installer package for the printer.

b

Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

c

Select a destination, and then click Continue.

d

From the Easy Install screen, click Install.

e

Type the user password, and then click OK.

All necessary applications are installed in the computer.

f

Click Close when installation is complete.

2

Add the printer:

a

For IP printing:

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

1

From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Print & Fax

2

Click +, and then click the IP tab.

3

Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.

Additional printer setup

In Mac OS X version 10.4

1

From the Finder, navigate to:

Applications > Utilities

2

Double

‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.

3

From the Printer List, choose Add, and then click IP Printer.

4

Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.

b

For AppleTalk printing:

Note: Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.

In Mac OS X version 10.5

1

From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Print & Fax

2

Click +, and then navigate to:

AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add

In Mac OS X version 10.4

1

From the Finder, navigate to:

Applications > Utilities

2

Double

‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.

3

From the Printer List, click Add.

4

Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.

5

From the first pop

‑up menu, select AppleTalk.

6

From the second pop

‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.

7

Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.

Installing the printer on a wired network

These instructions apply to Ethernet and fiber optic network connections.

Note: Make sure you have completed the initial setup of the printer.

For Windows users

1

Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

If the installation screen does not appear after a minute, then launch the CD manually:

a

Click , or click Start and then click Run.

b

In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of the CD or DVD drive.

c

Press Enter, or click OK.

2

Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Note: To configure the printer using a static IP address, IPv6, or scripts, select Advanced Options >

Administrator Tools.

3

Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.

4

Attach the appropriate cable to the computer and to the printer when instructed to do so.

40

Additional printer setup 41

5

Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.

Note: If the configured printer does not appear on the list, then click Modify Search.

6

Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

For Macintosh users

1

Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.

2

Obtain the printer IP address:

From the printer home screen

From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu

By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section

Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.

3

Install the printer drivers, and then add the printer.

a

Install a printer driver file on the computer:

1

Insert the Software and Documentation CD, and then double

‑click the installer package for the printer.

2

Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

3

Select a destination, and then click Continue.

4

From the Easy Install screen, click Install.

5

Type the user password, and then click OK.

All the necessary applications are installed in the computer.

6

Click Close when installation is complete.

b

Add the printer:

For IP printing:

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

1

From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Print & Fax

2

Click +, and then click the IP tab.

3

Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.

In Mac OS X version 10.4

1

From the Finder, navigate to:

Applications > Utilities

2

Double

‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.

3

From the Printer List, click Add, and then click IP Printer.

4

Type in the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.

For AppleTalk printing:

Note: Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.

In Mac OS X version 10.5

1

From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Print & Fax

2

Click +, and then navigate to:

AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add

Additional printer setup 42

In Mac OS X version 10.4

1

From the Finder, navigate to:

Applications > Utilities

2

Double

‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.

3

From the Printer List, click Add.

4

Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.

5

From the first pop

‑up menu, select AppleTalk.

6

From the second pop

‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.

7

Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.

Note: If the printer does not show up in the list, then you may need to add it using the IP address. For more information, contact your system support person.

Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port

When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address.

Notes:

If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.

If the computers are configured to use network name that will stay the same, instead of by IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to your computer configurations.

If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection, then make sure the wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If the wired connection remains connected, then the wireless configuration will complete, but the wireless ISP will not be active. In the event that the printer was configured for a wireless ISP while still attached to a wired connection, disconnect the wired connection, turn the printer off, and then turn the printer back on again. This will enable the wireless

ISP.

Only one network connection at a time is active. If you want to switch the connection type between wired and wireless, you must first turn the printer off, connect the cable (to switch to a wired connection) or disconnect the cable (to switch to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer on.

For Windows users

1

Click , or click Start and then click Run.

2

In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.

3

Press Enter, or click OK.

The printer folder opens.

4

Locate the printer that has changed.

Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.

5

Right

‑click the printer.

6

Click Properties > Ports tab.

7

Select the port from the list, and then click Configure Port.

Additional printer setup 43

8

Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field.

Note: View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

9

Click OK > Close.

For Macintosh users

Add the printer:

For IP printing:

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

1

From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Print & Fax

2

Click +, and then click the IP tab.

3

Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.

Note: View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

In Mac OS X version 10.4

1

From the Finder, navigate to:

Applications > Utilities

2

Double

‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.

3

From the Printer List, click Add, and then click IP Printer.

4

Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.

Note: View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

For AppleTalk printing:

Note: Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.

In Mac OS X version 10.5

1

From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Print & Fax

2

Click +, and then navigate to:

AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add

In Mac OS X version 10.4

1

From the Finder, navigate to:

Applications > Utilities

2

Double

‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.

3

From the Printer List, click Add.

4

Click the Default Browser tab > More Printers.

5

From the first pop

‑up menu, select AppleTalk.

Additional printer setup 44

6

From the second pop

‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.

7

Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.

Verifying printer setup

When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following:

Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.

Remove the option, and then install it again. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 72 for non

‑touch‑screen printer models, or “Printing a menu settings page” on page 114 for touch‑screen

printer models.

Network setup page—If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids

network printing configuration. For more information, see “Printing a network setup page” on page 72 for

non

‑touch screen printer models, or “Printing a network setup page” on page 114 for touch‑screen printer models.

Using C746x 45

Using C746x

Learning about the printer

Selecting a location for the printer

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:

Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.

Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee

156 standard.

Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.

Keep the printer:

Clean, dry, and free of dust.

Away from stray staples and paper clips.

Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.

Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.

Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:

Ambient temperature 15.6-32.2°C (60-90°F)

Storage temperature -40° to 40°C (-40 to 104°F)

Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:

5

3

1

Right side 100 mm (3.9 in.)

2

Front 400 mm (15.7 in.)

2

1

4

Using C746x 46

3

Left side 150 mm (5.9 in.)

4

Rear 100 mm (3.9 in.)

5

Top 150 mm (5.9 in.)

Printer configurations

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

You can configure your basic printer by adding up to three 550

‑sheet optional drawers and a 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder. A caster base and a spacer are supported in any configurations.

Spacers are nonfunctional trays used to add height to a printer stack. A spacer must be placed:

Directly on a caster base or table top

At the bottom of all tray stacks and cannot be used with an optional 2,000

‑sheet high‑capacity drawer.

For information on installing a spacer, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.

1

2

3

9

8

4

5

6

7

1

Standard output bin

2

Paper support

3

Printer control panel

4

Optional 550-sheet specialty media drawer

5

Optional 550

‑sheet drawer

6

Optional 2,000-sheet high

‑capacity feeder

7

Caster base

8

Standard 550

‑sheet drawer (Tray 1)

9

Multipurpose feeder

Using C746x

Using the four-arrow-button printer control panel

1

2 3

4 5

47

1

4

GHI

7

PQR

2

ABC

5

JKL

8

STU

0

3

DEF

6

MNO

9

WXYZ

10 9 8

7

6

Use the To

1

Display View the printer status.

Allow printer setup and operation.

2

Select button Submit changes made in the printer settings.

3

Arrow buttons Scroll up and down, or left and right.

4

Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.

5

Sleep button Enable Sleep mode.

The following are the statuses based on the indicator light and the Sleep button:

Entering or waking from Sleep mode

The indicator light is illuminated solid green.

The Sleep button is unilluminated.

Operating in Sleep mode

The indicator light is illuminated solid green.

The Sleep button is illuminated solid amber.

Entering or waking from Hibernate mode

The indicator light is illuminated solid green.

The Sleep button is illuminated blinking amber.

Operating in Hibernate mode

The indicator light is unilluminated.

The Sleep button is blinking amber for 0.1 second, and then goes completely unilluminated for 1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern.

The following actions wake the printer from Sleep mode:

Pressing any hard button

Opening Tray 1 or loading paper in the multipurpose feeder

Opening a door or cover

Sending a print job from the computer

Performing a power

‑on reset with the main power switch

Attaching a device to a USB port

6

Stop or Cancel button

7

Back button

Stop all printer activity.

Note: A list of options is displayed once Stopped appears on the display.

Return to the previous screen.

Using C746x 48

Use the To

8

Home button Go to the home screen.

9

Indicator light Check the status of the printer.

Off—The printer is off.

Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.

Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.

Blinking red—The printer requires operator intervention.

10

USB port Connect a flash drive to the printer.

Loading paper and specialty media

The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,

see “Avoiding jams” on page 201 and “Storing paper” on page 128.

Setting the paper size and type

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > > Paper Menu > > Paper Size/Type >

2

Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper tray or feeder, and then press .

3

Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper size, and then press .

4

Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper type, and then press to change the settings.

Configuring Universal paper settings

The Universal paper size is a user

‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus.

Notes:

The smallest supported Universal size is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) and is loaded only in the multipurpose feeder.

The largest supported Universal size is 215.9 x 1219.2 mm (8.5 x 48 in.) and is loaded only in the multipurpose feeder.

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > measure >

> Paper Menu > > Universal Setup > > Units of Measure > > select unit of

Using C746x 49

Loading the standard or an optional 550

sheet tray

The printer has one standard 550

‑sheet tray (Tray 1) and may have up to four optional 550‑sheet trays including the special media tray. For narrow paper sizes such as A6 and envelopes, use the special media tray. For more information,

see “Loading the optional 550

‑sheet special media tray” on page 52.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.

1

Pull the tray completely out.

Notes:

Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the printer display. Doing so may cause a jam.

The standard 550

‑sheet tray (Tray 1) does not automatically detect the paper size.

2

Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.

Notes:

Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the length and width guides.

Incorrect positioning of the width guide can cause paper jams.

Using C746x 50

3

Squeeze and slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.

Notes:

For some paper sizes like letter, legal, and A4, squeeze and slide the length guide backward to accommodate their length.

The length guide has a locking device. To unlock, slide to the left the button on top of the length guide. To lock, slide the button to the right when a length is selected.

1

2

3

Using C746x

4

Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

51

5

Load the paper stack with the recommended printable side faceup.

Notes:

When loading preprinted letterhead for one

‑sided printing, place the header faceup toward the front of the tray.

When loading preprinted letterhead for two

‑sided printing, place the header facedown toward the rear of the tray.

One

sided printing

Two

sided printing

LETTERHEAD

LETTERHEAD

Note: Make sure the paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the left side of the tray.

Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.

6

Insert the tray.

Note: For some paper sizes, the tray will extend past the back of the printer.

Using C746x 52

7

From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the tray based on the paper you loaded.

Note: Paper jams may occur if the paper size and type settings selected do not match the paper loaded.

Loading the optional 550

sheet special media tray

The optional 550

‑sheet special media tray (Tray 2), unlike any other trays, supports narrow paper sizes such as envelopes and A6.

2

1

3

4

1

Primary length guide

2

Length guide lock

3

Secondary length guide

4

Width guide

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.

Using C746x

Notes:

For instructions on loading paper sizes larger than A6 and envelopes, see “Loading the standard or an optional

550

‑sheet tray” on page 49.

For a complete list of supported paper sizes, see the “Supported paper sizes, types, and weights” section in the

User’s Guide.

Loading narrow paper sizes such as envelopes and A6

1

Pull the tray completely out.

Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.

53

2

Squeeze and slide the primary length guide toward you until it stops.

Notes:

The length has a locking device. To unlock the length guide, slide to the left the button on top of the length guide. To lock, slide the button to the right when a length has been selected.

You can only slide the secondary length guide when the primary length guide reaches the edge of the width guide.

Using C746x

1

2

3

3

Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.

1

2

Note: Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the width guide.

54

Using C746x

4

Squeeze and slide the secondary length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.

1

2

55

Using C746x

5

Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

56

6

Load the paper stack with the recommended printable side faceup.

Notes:

Load envelopes with the stamp side entering the printer first.

Make sure the paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the width guide.

Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.

Using C746x

7

Insert the tray.

8

From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the tray based on the paper you loaded.

Note: Return the secondary length guide back to its original position when loading long papers such as legal, letter, and A4. Squeeze and slide the guide until it clicks into place.

Loading the 2,000

sheet highcapacity feeder

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.

1

Pull the tray out.

2

Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.

57

Using C746x

3

Push the length guide button to the right to unlock the length guide.

58

4

Push the length guide release latch to raise the length guide. Slide the guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading, and then lock the guide.

Using C746x

5

Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

59

6

Load the paper stack:

Printable side faceup for one

‑sided printing

Printable side facedown for two

‑sided printing

Preprinted paper orientation for one

sided and twosided printing.

One

sided printing

Two

sided printing

D

HEA

TER

LET

D

HEA

TER

LET

Make sure paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the tray.

Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray may cause paper jams and possible printer damage.

Using C746x 60

7

Insert the tray.

Loading the multipurpose feeder

The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately:

100 sheets of 75

‑g/m

2

(20

‑lb) paper

10 envelopes

75 transparencies

Note: Do not add or remove paper or specialty media while the printer prints from the multipurpose feeder or when the printer control panel indicator light is blinking. Doing so may cause a jam.

Using C746x

6

LTR&LGL

A4

A5

5

4

3 2

1

1

Maximum paper fill indicator

2

Tray release latch

3

Paper release lever

4

Paper size indicators

5

Paper width guide

6

Width guide release tab

1

Press the tray release latch to the left, and then pull the multipurpose feeder down.

61

2

Gently pull the extension out until it is fully extended.

3

Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Using C746x

Paper

Envelopes

Transparencies*

* Avoid touching the printable side of transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.

4

Load the paper or specialty media. Slide the stack into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.

62

Notes:

Make sure paper or specialty media does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator.

Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.

Paper or specialty media should lie flat and fit loosely in the multipurpose feeder.

If the paper or specialty media is pushed too far into the multipurpose feeder, then press the paper release lever to remove it.

Load envelopes with the flap on the right side and the stamp edge entering the printer first.

Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or self

‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.

Using C746x 63

Linking and unlinking trays

When the paper size and paper type for any trays are the same, the printer will link those trays. When one linked tray becomes empty, paper will feed from the next linked tray. It is recommended to give all unique paper, such as letterhead and different colored plain papers, a different custom type name so that the trays they are in will not automatically link.

Unlinking trays

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Paper Menu.

3

Change the paper size and type settings of the tray so that they do not match the settings of any other tray, and then click Submit.

Warning—Potential Damage: The paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured.

Linking trays

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Paper Menu.

3

Change the paper size and type settings of the tray so that they match the settings of any other tray, and then click

Submit.

Using C746x 64

Creating a custom name for a paper type

If the printer is on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x] for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Navigate to:

Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names > type a name > Submit

Note: The custom name will replace Custom Type [x] under the “Custom Types” and “Paper Size and Type” menus.

3

Navigate to:

Custom Types > select a paper type > Submit

Assigning a custom paper type name

Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Name.

3

Type a name for the paper type, and then click Submit.

4

Select a custom type, and then verify that the correct paper type is associated with the custom name.

Note: Plain Paper is the factory default paper type for all user

‑defined custom names.

Configuring a custom name

If the printer is on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a custom name.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.

3

Select the custom name you want to configure, select a paper or specialty media type, and then click Submit.

Using C746x 65

Printing

The use of print preview and the selection of desired printing preferences such as duplex, margins and paper size can ensure that the print job output will appear as desired.

Printing a document

Printing a document

1

From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.

2

Send the print job:

For Windows users a

With a document open, click File > Print.

b

Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.

c

Adjust the settings, if necessary.

d

Click OK > Print.

For Macintosh users a

Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog if necessary:

1

With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.

2

Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.

3

Click OK.

b

Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog if necessary:

1

With a document open, choose File > Print.

If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2

From the Print dialog and pop

‑up menus adjust the settings if necessary.

Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.

3

Click Print.

Printing in black and white

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Print Mode > Black Only >

Adjusting toner darkness

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of the printer in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Using C746x 66

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.

3

Adjust the toner darkness setting.

4

Click Submit.

Using Max Speed and Max Yield

The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield. Max Yield is the factory default setting.

Max Speed—This lets you print in either black or color depending on what is set in the printer driver. The printer prints in color unless Black Only is selected in the printer driver.

Max Yield—This lets you switch from black to color based on the color content found on each page. Frequent color mode switching can result in slower printing if the content of pages is mixed.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu.

3

From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.

4

Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu

2

From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.

3

Press .

Printing from a mobile device

For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application, visit

http://lexmark.com/mobile

.

Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.

Using C746x

Printing from a flash drive

Printing from a flash drive

Notes:

Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to enter the file password from the printer control panel.

You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.

1

Insert a flash drive into the USB port.

67

Notes:

A flash drive icon appears on the home screen and in the held jobs icon when a flash drive is installed.

If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the printer ignores the flash drive.

If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, any connector, the memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. A loss of data can occur.

Using C746x

2

From the printer control panel, select the document you want to print.

3

Press the left or right arrow button to specify the number of copies for printing, and then press .

Notes:

Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.

If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print files from the flash drive as held jobs.

Supported flash drives and file types

Flash drive

Lexar JumpDrive 2.0 Pro (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)

SanDisk Cruzer Mini (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)

Notes:

Hi

‑Speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Devices supporting only

USB low

‑speed capabilities are not supported.

USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.

File type

Documents:

.pdf

.xps

Images:

.dcx

.gif

.JPEG or .jpg

.bmp

.pcx

.TIFF or .tif

.png

.fls

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Storing print jobs in the printer

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

68

Using C746x 69

> Settings > > Security > > Confidential Print > select the print job type

Print job type

Max Invalid PIN

Confidential Job Expiration

Repeat Job Expiration

Verify Job Expiration

Reserve Job Expiration

Description

Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.

Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.

Lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel.

Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the numbers 0–9.

Lets you print and store print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting.

Lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed.

Lets you store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.

Notes:

Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs.

You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel.

All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.

2

Press .

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you choose to delete them.

For Windows users

1

With a document open, click File > Print.

2

Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.

3

Click Print and Hold.

4

Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four

‑digit PIN.

5

Click OK or Print.

6

From the printer control panel, release the print job.

For confidential print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

For other print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

Using C746x 70

For Macintosh users

1

With a document open, choose File > Print.

If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2

From the print options or Copies & Pages pop

‑up menu, choose Job Routing.

3

Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four

‑digit PIN.

4

Click OK or Print.

5

From the printer control panel, release the print job:

For confidential print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

For other print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

Printing information pages

Printing a font sample list

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > > Reports > > Print Fonts

2

Press the up or down arrow button to select the font setting.

3

Press .

Note: The PPDS fonts appear only when the PPDS data stream is activated.

Printing a directory list

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > Reports > > Print Directory >

Note: The Print Directory menu item appears only when an optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed.

Canceling a print job

Canceling a print job from the printer control panel

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

>

Using C746x

Canceling a print job from the computer

For Windows users

1

Open the printers folder:

a

Click , or click Start and then click Run.

b

In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.

c

Press Enter, or click OK.

2

Double

‑click the printer icon.

3

Select the print job you want to cancel.

4

From the keyboard, press Delete.

For Macintosh users

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later:

1

From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences > Print & Fax > Open Print Queue.

2

From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel.

3

From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.

In Mac OS X version 10.4:

1

From the Finder, navigate to:

Go > Applications > Utilities

2

Double

‑click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.

3

Double

‑click the printer icon.

4

From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel.

5

From the icon bar at the top of the window, click Delete.

Managing your printer

Finding advanced networking and administrator information

This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server

Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Checking the virtual display

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

71

Using C746x 72

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.

The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.

Printing a menu settings page

Print a menu settings page to view the current menu settings and to verify if the printer options are installed correctly.

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > Reports > > Menu Settings Page >

Note: If you have not changed any menu settings, then the menu settings page lists all the factory default settings.

Settings saved from the menus replace the factory default settings as user default settings. A user default setting remains in effect until you access the menu again, select another value, and save it.

Printing a network setup page

If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > Reports > > Network Setup Page >

Note: If an optional internal print server is installed, then Print Network [x] Setup Page appears.

2

Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.

If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.

Consult your system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.

Checking the status of parts and supplies

A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required. For

more information, see “Supplies menu” on page 133.

Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Status/Supplies > View Supplies >

Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server

Note: Make sure the computer and printer are connected to the same network.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Using C746x 73

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Device Status > More Details.

Saving energy

Using Eco

mode

Use Eco

‑Mode to quickly select one or more ways to reduce your printer's environmental impact.

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Use

Off

> Settings > Settings > > General Settings > > Eco

Mode >

> select the setting you want

To

Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco

‑Mode. This setting supports the performance specifications for your printer.

Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.

Printer engine motors do not start until a job is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed.

The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.

Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.

Plain Paper

Enable the automatic two

‑sided (duplex) feature.

Turn off print log features.

2

Press .

Reducing printer noise

Use Quiet Mode to reduce the printer noise.

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Use

On

> Settings > Settings > > General Settings > > Quiet Mode > > select a setting you want

To

Reduce printer noise.

Print jobs will process at a reduced speed.

Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. There is a short delay before the first page is printed.

If your printer has faxing capability, then fax sounds are reduced or disabled, including those made by the fax speaker and ringer. The fax is placed in standby mode.

The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off.

The printer will ignore the Advance Start command.

Using C746x 74

Use

Off

To

Use factory default settings. This setting supports the performance specifications of the printer.

Note: Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable

Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing.

2

Press .

Adjusting Sleep mode

To save energy, decrease the number of minutes the printer waits before it enters Sleep mode.

Available settings range from 1–180 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.

3

In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode.

4

Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > Settings > > General Settings > > Timeouts > > Sleep Mode >

2

Press the left or right arrow button to select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters

Sleep mode.

3

Press .

Using Hibernate Mode

Hibernate is an ultra

‑low power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.

Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Using C746x 75

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If your are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.

3

From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop

‑down menu, select Hibernate.

4

Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > Settings > > General Settings >

2

Press Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button, and then press .

3

Press Hibernate > .

Restoring factory default settings

If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring

the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 72.

If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All

Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non

‑volatile memory” on page 77.

Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in printer hard disk are not affected.

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > Settings > > General Settings > > Factory Defaults > > Restore Now >

Using C746x 76

Securing the printer

Locking the system board

To lock access to the system board, attach a security lock to the printer in the location identified in the illustration. The printer is compatible with most laptop computer security locks.

Statement of Volatility

Your printer contains various types of memory that can store printer and network settings, and user data.

Types of memory Description

Volatile memory Your printer uses standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy jobs.

Non-volatile memory

Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory: EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information, scanner and bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.

Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality. This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data and font data.

Erase the contents of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:

The printer is being decommissioned.

The printer hard disk is being replaced.

The printer is being moved to a different department or location.

The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.

The printer is being removed from your premises for service.

The printer is being sold to another organization.

Disposing of a printer hard disk

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

Using C746x 77

In high

‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.

Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data

Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable

Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits

Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.

Erasing volatile memory

The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered data, turn off the printer.

Erasing non

volatile memory

Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.

Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.

1

Turn off the printer.

2

Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.

The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully powered up, the printer displays a list of functions.

3

Press the up or down arrow button until Wipe All Settings appears.

The printer will restart several times during this process.

Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords from the printer memory.

4

Navigate to:

Back > Exit Config Menu

The printer will perform a power

‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Erasing printer hard disk memory

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.

Using the printer control panel

1

Turn off the printer.

2

Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.

The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully powered up, the printer displays a list of functions.

Using C746x 78

3

Press the up or down arrow button until Wipe Disk appears, and then select one of the following:

Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.

Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22

‑M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.

4

Press the up or down arrow button until Yes appears, and then proceed with disk wiping.

A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.

Notes:

A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.

Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.

5

Navigate to:

Back > Exit Config Menu

The printer will perform a power

‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Configuring printer hard disk encryption

Enable the hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.

Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non

‑defective printer hard disk is installed.

3

From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.

Notes:

Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk.

Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.

Using the printer control panel

1

Turn off the printer.

2

Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.

The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully powered up, the printer displays a list of functions.

Using C746x 79

3

Navigate to:

Disk Encryption > Enable

Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.

4

Select Yes to proceed with disk wiping.

Notes:

Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.

Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.

A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer will return to the screen for enabling or disabling disk encryption.

5

Navigate to:

Back > Exit Config Menu

The printer will perform a power

‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Finding printer security information

In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed. For more information, visit the Lexmark security Web page and see the Embedded

Web Server Administrator’s Guide.

1

Visit http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:

Tech Library > Manuals & Guides

2

Type Embedded Web Server in the keyword field, and then click Filter.

3

Click Embedded Web Server to launch the document.

Using C748x 80

Using C748x

Learning about the printer

Selecting a location for the printer

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:

Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.

Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee

156 standard.

Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.

Keep the printer:

Clean, dry, and free of dust.

Away from stray staples and paper clips.

Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.

Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.

Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:

Ambient temperature

Storage temperature

15.6-32.2°C (60-90°F)

-40° to 40°C (-40 to 104°F)

Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:

5

3

1

Right side 100 mm (3.9 in.)

2

Front 400 mm (15.7 in.)

2

1

4

Using C748x 81

3

Left side 150 mm (5.9 in.)

4

Rear 100 mm (3.9 in.)

5

Top 150 mm (5.9 in.)

Printer configurations

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

You can configure your basic printer by adding up to three 550

‑sheet optional drawers and a 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder. A caster base and a spacer are supported in any configurations.

Spacers are nonfunctional trays used to add height to a printer stack. Spacers must be:

Placed directly on a caster base or table top

Placed at the bottom of all tray stacks, and cannot be used with an optional 2,000

‑sheet high‑capacity drawer.

For information on installing a spacer, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.

1

2

3

9

8

4

5

6

7

1

Standard output bin

2

Paper support

3

Printer control panel

4

Optional 550-sheet specialty media drawer

5

Optional 550

‑sheet drawer

6

Optional 2,000

‑sheet high‑capacity feeder

7

Caster base

8

Standard 550

‑sheet drawer (Tray 1)

9

Multipurpose feeder

Using C748x

Using the touch

screen printer control panel

1 2 3

82

4

1

4

GHI

7

PQR

2

ABC

3

DEF

5

8

JKL

STU

0

6

MNO

9

WXYZ

7 6 5

1

Use the

Display

To

View the printer status.

Allow printer setup and operation.

2

Home button Return to the home screen.

3

Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.

4

Sleep button Enable Sleep mode.

The following are the statuses based on the indicator light and the Sleep button:

Entering or waking from Sleep mode

The indicator light is illuminated solid green.

The sleep button is unilluminated.

Operating in Sleep mode

The indicator light is illuminated solid green.

The sleep button is illuminated solid amber.

Entering or waking from Hibernate mode

The indicator light is illuminated solid green.

The sleep button is illuminated blinking amber.

Operating in Hibernate mode

The indicator light is unilluminated.

The sleep button is blinking amber for 0.1 of a second, then goes completely unilluminated for 1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern.

The following actions wake the printer from Sleep mode:

Touching the screen or pressing any hard button

Opening Tray 1 or loading paper in the multipurpose feeder

Opening a door or cover

Sending a print job from the computer

Performing a power

‑on reset with the main power switch

Attaching a device to a USB port

5

Stop or Cancel button

Stop all printer activity.

Note: A list of options is displayed when Stopped appears on the display.

Using C748x 83

Use the To

6

Indicator light Check the status of the printer.

Off—The printer is off.

Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.

Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.

Blinking red—The printer requires operator intervention.

7

USB port Connect a flash drive to the printer.

Understanding the home screen

When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Use the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action.

Note: Your home screen, icons, and the buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.

1 2 3

4

123.123.123.123

Touch

1

Change Language

2

Bookmarks

3

Held Jobs

4

USB or USB

Thumbdrive

5

Menus

6

Status message bar

8 7 6 5

To

Change the primary language of the printer.

Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URLs) into a tree view of folders and file links.

Note: The tree view does not include bookmarks created within Forms and Favorites, and the ones in the tree are not usable in Forms and Favorites.

Display all current held jobs.

View, select, or print photos and documents from a flash drive.

Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or flash drive is connected to the printer.

Access printer menus.

Note: These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state.

Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.

Show printer conditions such as Fuser missing or Cartridge Low.

Show intervention messages and the instructions on how to clear them.

Using C748x 84

Touch

7

Status/Supplies

8

Tips

To

Display a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing.

Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.

View a context

‑sensitive help information.

This may also appear on the home screen:

Touch

Search Held Jobs

To

Search current held jobs.

Features

Feature

Attendance message alert

Description

If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks.

Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.

Printer IP address

Example: 123.123.123.123

The IP address of your network printer is located at the top left corner of the home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can use the

IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.

Using the touch-screen buttons

Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.

Using C748x

Sample touch screen

1

2

3 4

Touch

1

Up arrow

To

Scroll up.

10

9 8

7

6

5

2

Delete folder Delete the file you selected.

3

Left arrow Scroll to the left.

4

Right arrow Scroll to the right.

5

Right scroll increase Scroll to another value in increasing order.

6

Left scroll decrease Scroll to another value in decreasing order.

7

Down arrow Scroll down.

85

Using C748x

Touch

8

Accept

9

Cancel

10

Back

To

Save a setting.

Cancel an action or a selection.

Cancel out a screen and return to the previous screen.

Navigate back to the previous screen.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Notes:

Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only in select printer models.

There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. To learn more, visit

www.lexmark.com. Or, inquire at your point of purchase.

Accessing the Embedded Web Server

The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.

1

Obtain the printer IP address:

From the printer control panel home screen

From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu

By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section

Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

The Embedded Web Server page appears.

86

Using C748x 87

Showing or hiding icons on the home screen

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2

Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.

A list of basic printer functions appears.

3

Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen.

Note: Cleared check box items are hidden.

4

Click Submit.

Activating the home screen applications

Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information about accessing the Embedded

Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 86.

For detailed information about configuring and using the home screen applications, visit the Lexmark Web site at

http://support.lexmark.com.

Using Background and Idle Screen

Icon Description

The application lets you customize the background and idle screen of your printer home screen.

1

From the home screen, navigate to:

Change Background > select background to use

2

Touch .

Using C748x 88

Setting up Forms and Favorites

Icon Description

The application helps you simplify and streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the home screen.

Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2

Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Forms and Favorites.

3

Define the bookmarks, and then customize the settings.

4

Click Apply.

To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.

Understanding Eco

Settings

Icon Description

The application lets you easily manage energy consumption, noise, toner, and paper usage settings to help reduce the environmental impact of your printer.

Understanding Showroom

Icon Description

The application lets you create and display a customized slide show on the touch screen of your printer.

You can load images either from a flash drive or through the printer Embedded Web Server.

Using C748x 89

Setting up Remote Operator Panel

This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing at the network printer.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2

Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Remote Operator Panel.

3

Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.

4

Click Apply.

To use the application, from the Embedded Web Server, click Applications > Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC

Applet.

Exporting and importing a configuration

You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import it to apply the settings to other printers.

Exporting a configuration to a file

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2

Click Settings or Configuration.

3

Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.

4

From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.

5

Click Configure > Export.

6

Follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file, and then type a unique file name or use the default name.

Note: If a JVM Out of Memory error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is saved.

Importing a configuration from a file

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

2

Click Settings or Configuration.

3

Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.

4

From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.

Using C748x 90

5

Click Configure > Import.

6

Browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer, and then load or preview it.

Note: If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.

Loading paper and specialty media

The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,

see “Avoiding jams” on page 201 and “Storing paper” on page 128.

Setting the paper size and type

From the home screen navigate to:

> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type >

Configuring Universal paper settings

The Universal paper size is a user

‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus.

Notes:

The smallest supported Universal size is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) and loaded only in the multipurpose feeder.

The largest supported Universal size is 215.9 x 1219.2 mm (8.5 x 48 in.) and loaded only in the multipurpose feeder.

1

From the home screen, navigate to:

> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select the unit of measure >

2

Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.

3

Select the width or height, and then touch .

Using C748x 91

Loading the standard or an optional 550

sheet tray

The printer has one standard 550

‑sheet tray (Tray 1) and may have up to four optional 550‑sheet trays including the special media tray. For narrow paper sizes such as A6 and envelopes, use the special media tray. For more information,

see “Loading the optional 550

‑sheet special media tray” on page 94.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.

1

Pull the tray completely out.

Notes:

Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.

The standard 550

‑sheet tray (Tray 1) does not automatically detect the paper size.

2

Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.

Notes:

Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the length and width guides.

Incorrect positioning of the width guide can cause paper jams.

Using C748x 92

3

Squeeze and slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.

Notes:

For some paper sizes like letter, legal, and A4, squeeze and slide the length guide backward to accommodate their length.

The length guide has a locking device. To unlock, slide to the left the button on top of the length guide. To lock, slide the button to the right when a length is selected.

1

2

3

Using C748x

4

Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

93

5

Load the paper stack toward the back of the tray with the recommended printable side faceup.

Notes:

When loading preprinted letterhead for one

‑sided printing, place the letterhead faceup toward the front of the tray.

When loading preprinted letterhead for two

‑sided printing, place the letterhead facedown toward the rear of the tray.

One

sided printing

Two

sided (Duplex) printing

LETTERHEAD

LETTERHEAD

Note: Make sure the paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the left side of the tray.

Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.

6

Insert the tray.

Note: For some paper sizes, the tray will extend past the back of the printer.

Using C748x

7

From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the tray based on the paper you loaded.

Loading the optional 550

sheet special media tray

The optional 550

‑sheet special media tray (Tray 2) supports narrow paper sizes such as envelopes and A6.

2

1

3

4

1

Primary length guide

2

Length guide lock

3

Secondary length guide

4

Width guide

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.

Notes:

For instructions on loading paper sizes larger than A6 and envelopes, see “Loading the standard or an optional

550

‑sheet tray” on page 91.

94

Using C748x

For a complete list of supported paper sizes, see the "Supported paper sizes, types, and weights" section in the

User's Guide.

Loading narrow paper sizes such as envelopes and A6

1

Pull the tray completely out.

Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.

95

2

Squeeze and slide the primary length guide toward you until it stops.

Notes:

The length has a locking device. To unlock the length guide, slide to the left the button on top of the length guide. To lock, slide the button to the right when a length has been selected.

You can only slide the secondary length guide when the primary length guide reaches the edge of the width guide.

Using C748x

1

2

3

3

Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.

1

2

Note: Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the width guide.

96

Using C748x

4

Squeeze and slide the secondary length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.

1

2

97

Using C748x

5

Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

98

6

Load the paper stack with the recommended printable side faceup.

Notes:

Load envelopes with the stamp side entering the printer first.

Make sure the paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the width guide.

Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.

Using C748x

7

Insert the tray.

8

From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the tray based on the paper you loaded.

Note: Return the secondary length guide to its original position when loading long papers such as legal, letter, and

A4. Squeeze and slide the guide until it clicks into place.

Loading the 2,000

sheet highcapacity feeder

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper tray separately.

Keep all other trays closed until needed.

1

Pull the tray out.

2

Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.

99

Using C748x

3

Unlock the length guide.

100

4

Push the length guide release latch to raise the length guide. Slide the guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading, and then lock the guide.

Using C748x

5

Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

101

6

Load the paper stack:

Printable side faceup for one

‑sided printing

Printable side facedown for two

‑sided printing

One

sided printing

D

HEA

TER

LET

Two

sided printing

D

HEA

TER

LET

Make sure paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the tray.

Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray may cause paper jams and possible printer damage.

7

Insert the tray.

Using C748x 102

Loading the multipurpose feeder

The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately:

100 sheets of 75

‑g/m

2

(20

‑lb) paper

10 envelopes

75 transparencies

Note: Do not add or remove paper or specialty media while the printer prints from the multipurpose feeder or when the printer control panel indicator light is blinking. Doing so may cause a jam.

6

A5

5

4

3 2

1

1

Maximum paper fill indicator

2

Tray release latch

3

Paper release lever

4

Paper size indicators

5

Paper width guide

6

Width guide release tab

1

Press the tray release latch to the left, and then pull the multipurpose feeder down.

Using C748x

2

Gently pull the extension out until it is fully extended.

3

Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Paper

Envelopes

Transparencies*

* Avoid touching the printable side of transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.

103

Using C748x

4

Load the paper or specialty media. Slide the stack into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.

104

Notes:

Make sure paper or specialty media does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator.

Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.

Paper or specialty media should lie flat and fit loosely in the multipurpose feeder.

If the paper or specialty media is pushed too far into the multipurpose feeder, then press the paper release lever to remove it.

Load envelopes with the flap on the right side up and the stamp edge entering the printer first.

Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or self

‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.

5

From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the feeder based on the paper you loaded.

Linking and unlinking trays

When the paper size and paper type for any trays are the same, the printer will link those trays. When one linked tray becomes empty, paper will feed from the next linked tray. It is recommended to give all unique paper, such as letterhead and different colored plain papers, a different custom type name so that the trays they are in will not automatically link.

Unlinking trays

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Using C748x 105

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Paper Menu.

3

Change the paper size and type settings of the tray so that they do not match the settings of any other tray, and then click Submit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.

The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured.

Linking trays

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Paper Menu.

3

Change the paper type and size settings of the tray so that they match the settings of any other tray, and then click

Submit.

Creating a custom name for a paper type

If the printer is on a network, then use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x] for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Navigate to:

Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Name > type a name > Submit

Note: The custom name will replace Custom Type [x] under the Custom Types and Paper Size and Type menus.

3

Navigate to:

Custom Types > select a paper type > Submit

Assigning a custom paper type name

Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Using C748x 106

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.

3

Type a name for the paper type, and then click Submit.

4

Select a custom type, and then verify that the correct paper type is associated with the custom name.

Note: Plain Paper is the factory default paper type for all user

‑defined custom names.

Configuring a custom name

If the printer is on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x] for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.

3

Select a custom name you want to configure, select a paper or specialty media type, and then click Submit.

Printing

The use of print preview and the selection of desired printing preferences such as duplex, margins and paper size can ensure that the print job output will appear as desired.

Printing forms

Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that

is regularly printed. Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 88.

1

From the printer home screen, navigate to:

Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings

2

Depending on your printer model, touch , , or Submit.

Printing a document

Printing a document

1

From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.

2

Send the print job:

Using C748x

For Windows users a

With a document open, click File > Print.

b

Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.

c

Adjust the settings, if necessary.

d

Click OK > Print.

For Macintosh users a

Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:

1

With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.

2

Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.

3

Click OK.

b

Customize the settings in the Print dialog:

1

With a document open, choose File > Print.

If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2

From the Print dialog and pop

‑up menus, adjust the settings if necessary.

Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.

3

Click Print.

Printing in black and white

From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Print Mode > Black Only >

Adjusting toner darkness

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.

3

Adjust the toner darkness setting.

4

Click Submit.

107

Using C748x 108

Using Max Speed and Max Yield

The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield. Max Yield is the factory default setting.

Max Speed—This lets you print in either black or color depending on what is set in the printer driver. The printer prints in color unless Black Only is selected in the printer driver.

Max Yield—This lets you switch from black to color based on the color content found on each page. Frequent color mode switching can result in slower printing if the content of pages is mixed.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu.

3

From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.

4

Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1

From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu

2

From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.

3

Touch .

Printing from a mobile device

For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application, visit

http://lexmark.com/mobile

.

Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.

Using C748x 109

Printing from a flash drive

Printing from a flash drive

Notes:

Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to enter the file password from the printer control panel.

You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.

1

Insert a flash drive into the USB port.

Notes:

A flash drive icon appears on the home screen and in the held jobs icon when a flash drive is installed.

If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the printer ignores the flash drive.

If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, any connector, the memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. A loss of data can occur.

Using C748x

2

From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.

3

Touch the arrows to specify the number of copies for printing, and then touch Print.

Notes:

Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.

If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print files from the flash drive as held jobs.

Supported flash drives and file types

Flash drive

Lexar JumpDrive 2.0 Pro (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)

SanDisk Cruzer Mini (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)

Notes:

Hi

‑Speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Devices supporting only

USB low

‑speed capabilities are not supported.

USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.

File type

Documents:

.pdf

.xps

Images:

.dcx

.gif

.JPEG or .jpg

.bmp

.pcx

.TIFF or .tif

.png

.fls

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Storing print jobs in the printer

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

110

Using C748x 111

> Settings > Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type

Print job type

Max Invalid PIN

Confidential Job Expiration

Repeat Job Expiration

Verify Job Expiration

Reserve Job Expiration

Description

Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.

Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.

Lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel.

Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the numbers 0–9.

Lets you print and store print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting.

Lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed.

Lets you store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.

Notes:

Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs.

You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel.

All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.

2

Touch .

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.

For Windows users

1

With a document open, click File > Print.

2

Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.

3

Click Print and Hold.

4

Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four

‑digit PIN.

5

Click OK or Print.

6

From the printer home screen, release the print job.

For confidential print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print

For other print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

Using C748x 112

For Macintosh users

1

With a document open, choose File > Print.

If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2

From the print options or Copies & Pages pop

‑up menu, choose Job Routing.

3

Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four

‑digit PIN.

4

Click OK or Print.

5

From the printer home screen, release the print job.

For confidential print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print

For other print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

Printing information pages

Printing a font sample list

1

From the home screen, navigate to:

> Reports > Print Fonts

2

Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.

Printing a directory list

A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk.

From the home screen, navigate to:

> Reports > Print Directory

Canceling a print job

Canceling a print job from the printer control panel

1

Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen, or press on the keypad.

2

Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.

Using C748x 113

Canceling a print job from the computer

For Windows users

1

Open the printers folder:

a

Click , or click Start and then click Run.

b

In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.

c

Press Enter, or click OK.

2

Double

‑click the printer icon.

3

Select the print job you want to cancel.

4

From the keyboard, press Delete.

For Macintosh users

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later:

1

From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences > Print & Fax > Open Print Queue.

2

From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel.

3

From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.

In Mac OS X version 10.4:

1

From the Finder, navigate to:

Go > Applications > Utilities

2

Double

‑click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.

3

Double

‑click the printer icon.

4

From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel.

5

From the icon bar at the top of the window, click Delete.

Managing your printer

Finding advanced networking and administrator information

This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server

Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Checking the virtual display

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Using C748x 114

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.

The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.

Printing a menu settings page

From the home screen, navigate to:

> Reports > Menu Settings Page

Printing a network setup page

If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

1

From the home screen, navigate to:

> Reports > Network Setup Page

2

Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.

If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.

Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.

Checking the status of parts and supplies

A message appears on the printer display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.

For more information, see “Supplies menu” on page 133.

Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel

From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.

Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server

Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Device Status > More Details.

Using C748x 115

Saving energy

Using Eco

Mode

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > General Settings > Eco

Mode > select a setting

Use

Off

Energy

To

Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco

‑Mode. Off supports the performance specifications of the printer.

Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.

Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed.

The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.

Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.

Plain Paper

Enable the automatic two

‑sided (duplex) feature.

Turn off print log features.

3

Click Submit.

Reducing printer noise

To select a Quiet Mode setting using the Embedded Web Server:

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting

Using C748x 116

Use

On

To

Reduce printer noise.

Print jobs will process at a reduced speed.

Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. There will be a short delay before the first page is printed.

If your printer has faxing capability, then fax sounds are reduced or disabled, including those made by the fax speaker and ringer. The fax is placed in standby mode.

The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off.

The printer will ignore the Advance Start command.

Off

Note: Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable

Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing.

Use factory default settings. This setting supports the performance specifications of the printer.

3

Click Submit.

Adjusting Sleep mode

To save energy, decrease the number of minutes the printer waits before it enters Sleep mode.

Available settings range from 1–180 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.

3

In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.

4

Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1

From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode

2

In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.

3

Touch .

Using C748x 117

Using Hibernate Mode

Hibernate is an ultra

‑low power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and all other systems and devices are powered down safely.

Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.

3

From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop

‑down menu, select Hibernate.

4

Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1

From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > General Settings

2

Touch Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button.

3

Touch Hibernate > .

Adjusting the brightness of the display

To save energy, or if you are have trouble reading your display, adjust the brightness of the display.

Available settings range from 20–100. The factory default setting is 100.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > General Settings.

3

In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.

4

Click Submit.

Using C748x 118

Using the printer control panel

1

From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > General Settings > Screen Brightness

2

In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.

3

Touch .

Restoring factory default settings

If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring

the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 114.

If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All

Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non

‑volatile memory” on page 119.

Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected.

From the home screen, navigate to:

> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now >

Securing the printer

Locking the system board

To limit access to the system board, attach a security lock to the printer in the location identified in the illustration. The printer is compatible with most laptop computer security locks.

Using C748x 119

Statement of Volatility

Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.

Types of memory

Volatile memory

Non-volatile memory

Hard disk memory

Description

Your printer uses standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy jobs.

Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:

EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information, scanner and bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.

Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality. This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.

Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:

The printer is being decommissioned.

The printer hard disk is being replaced.

The printer is being moved to a different department or location.

The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.

The printer is being removed from your premises for service.

The printer is being sold to another organization.

Disposing of a printer hard disk

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

In high

‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.

Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data

Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable

Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits

Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.

Erasing volatile memory

The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered data, simply turn off the printer.

Erasing non

volatile memory

Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.

Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.

Using C748x 120

1

Turn off the printer.

2

Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.

The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.

3

Touch Wipe All Settings.

The printer will restart several times during this process.

Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords from the printer memory.

4

Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.

The printer will perform a power

‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Erasing printer hard disk memory

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.

Using the printer control panel

1

Turn off the printer.

2

Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.

The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.

3

Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:

Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.

Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22

‑M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.

4

Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.

Notes:

A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.

Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.

5

Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.

The printer will perform a power

‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Using C748x 121

Configuring printer hard disk encryption

Enable the hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.

Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.

Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non

‑defective printer hard disk is installed.

3

From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.

Notes:

Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk.

Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.

4

Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1

Turn off the printer.

2

Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.

The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. Once the printer is fully powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or

Fax.

3

Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.

Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.

4

Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.

Notes:

Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.

Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.

A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer will return to the Enable/Disable screen.

5

Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.

The printer will perform a power

‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Using C748x 122

Finding printer security information

In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed. For more information, visit the Lexmark security Web page and see the Embedded

Web Server Administrator’s Guide.

1

Visit http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:

Tech Library > Manuals & Guides

2

Type Embedded Web Server in the keyword field, and then click Filter.

3

Click Embedded Web Server to launch the document.

Paper and specialty media guidelines 123

Paper and specialty media guidelines

Using specialty media

Tips on using letterhead

Use letterhead designed specifically for laser/LED printers.

Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.

Before loading letterhead, flex the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.

Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead.

Source

Standard and optional trays

One

or twosided

printing

One

‑sided

Printable side

Load preprinted letterhead faceup.

Paper orientation

Place the top edge of the sheet with the header toward the front of the tray.

Standard and optional trays Two

‑sided

Load preprinted letterhead facedown.

Place the top edge of the sheet with the header toward the rear of the tray.

Multipurpose feeder One

‑sided

Load preprinted letterhead facedown.

When loading in shortedge orientation, place the top edge of the sheet with the header toward the rear of the multipurpose feeder.

When loading in long-edge orientation, place the top edge of the sheet with the header on the left of the multipurpose feeder.

Multipurpose feeder Two

‑sided

Load preprinted letterhead faceup.

Place the top edge of the sheet with the header toward the front of the multipurpose feeder.

Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser/LED printers.

Tips on using transparencies

Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.

Feed transparencies from the multipurpose feeder only.

From the Paper menu, set the MP Feeder Type to Transparency.

Paper and specialty media guidelines 124

Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures of 230°C (446°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.

To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.

Before loading transparencies, flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.

We recommend Lexmark transparencies. For ordering information, see the Lexmark Web site at

www.lexmark.com.

Tips on using envelopes

Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.

Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or releasing hazardous emissions.

For best performance, use envelopes made from 90

‑g/m

2

(24

‑lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All‑cotton envelopes must not exceed 70

‑g/m

2

(20

‑lb bond) weight.

Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.

To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:

Have excessive curl or twist.

Are stuck together or damaged in any way.

Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.

Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.

Have an interlocking design.

Have postage stamps attached.

Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.

Have bent corners.

Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.

Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.

Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.

Tips on using labels

The printer supports the following types of labels designed for laser/LED printers:

One

‑sided paper labels

Vinyl, pharmacy, and double

‑sided labels

Vertical marketing labels

For detailed information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Paper and specialty media guidelines 125

When printing on labels:

Use labels designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:

The labels can withstand temperatures up to 225°C (437°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.

Note: Labels can be printed at a higher fusing temperature up to 225°C (437°F) if Label Weight is set to

Heavy. Select this setting using the Embedded Web Server, or from the Paper menu on the printer control panel.

Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure without delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.

Do not use labels with slick backing material.

Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.

Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.

Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die

‑cuts of the label.

Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.) away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.

If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, then remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge, and use a non

‑oozing adhesive.

Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.

Tips on using card stock

Card stock is heavy, single

‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness, and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.

From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Card Stock.

Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.

Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems.

Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F) without releasing hazardous emissions.

Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting introduces semi

‑liquid and volatile components into the printer.

Use grain short card stock when possible.

Paper guidelines

Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample of the paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.

Paper characteristics

The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock.

Paper and specialty media guidelines 126

Weight

The printer trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 90 g/m

2

(24 lb bond) grain long paper. The manual feeder can automatically feed paper weights up to 163 g/m

2

(43 lb bond) grain long paper. Paper lighter than 60 g/m

2

(16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m

2

(20 lb bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m

2

(24 lb) or heavier paper.

Note: Duplex printing is supported only for 60–90 g/m

2

(16–24 lb bond) paper.

Curl

Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems.

Smoothness

Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100–300 Sheffield points; smoothness between 150–250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.

Moisture content

The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.

Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.

Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to

48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.

Grain direction

Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.

For 60–90 g/m

2

(16–24 lb bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended.

Fiber content

Most high

‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.

Unacceptable paper

The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:

Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper

Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer

Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser

Paper and specialty media guidelines 127

Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm (±0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms

In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.

Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers

Rough

‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers

Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)

Paper weighing less than 60 g/m

2

(16 lb)

Multiple

‑part forms or documents

Selecting paper

Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble

‑free printing.

To help avoid jams and poor print quality:

Always use new, undamaged paper.

Before loading paper, know the recommended print side. This information is usually indicated on the package.

Do not use paper, paper labels, or card stock that has been cut or trimmed by hand.

Do not mix sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.

Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead

Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:

Use grain long for 60–90 g/m

2

(16–24 lb) paper.

Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.

Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.

Use papers printed with heat

‑resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation

‑set or oil‑based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.

When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.

Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.

Using recycled paper and other office papers

As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However, no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.

Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of test paper from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has found no reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property guidelines apply to recycled paper.

Low moisture content (4–5%)

Paper and specialty media guidelines 128

Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)

Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.

Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)

Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed

Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m

2

[16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing conditions).

Storing paper

Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:

For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24°C (65 to 75°F) with relative humidity between

40 and 60%.

Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.

Store individual packages on a flat surface.

Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights

Supported paper sizes

Paper size and dimension

Standard

550

sheet tray

Optional

550

sheet tray

Optional

550

sheet

specialty media drawer

Optional

2,000

sheet

high

capacity

feeder

Multipurpose feeder

Manual paper

Manual envelope

Duplex

A4

210 x 297 mm

(8.27 x 11.7 in.)

A5

148 x 210 mm

(5.83 x 8.27 in.)

2

2

1

1

1

2

X

1 2

2

2

2

X

X

1

Source supports paper size with size sensing.

2

Source supports paper size without size sensing.

3

Paper size is supported if set to US.

4

Paper size is supported if set to metric.

5

Paper size is supported if its length is between 8.27 in. (210 mm) and 14 in. (355.6 mm); and its width is between 5.5 in. (139.7 mm) and 8.5 in. (215.9 mm) in short

‑edge loading orientation.

6

This size setting formats the envelope for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software program.

7

Turn Size Sensing off to support universal sizes that are close to standard media sizes.

Paper and specialty media guidelines 129

Paper size and dimension

Standard

550

sheet tray

Optional

550

sheet tray

Optional

550

sheet

specialty media drawer

Optional

2,000

sheet

high

capacity

feeder

2

X

Multipurpose feeder

Manual paper

Manual envelope

Duplex

A6

105 x 148 mm

(4.13 x 5.83 in.)

JIS B5

182 x 257 mm

(7.17 x 10.1 in.)

Letter

215.9 x 279.4 mm

(8.5 x 11 in.)

Legal

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(8.5 x 14 in.)

Executive

184.2 x 266.7 mm

(7.25 x 10.5 in.)

Oficio (México)

215.9 x 340.4 mm

(8.5 x 13.4 in.)

Folio

215.9 x 330.2 mm

(8.5 x 13 in.)

Statement

139.7 x 215.9 mm

(5.5 x 8.5 in.)

Universal

7

148 x 210 mm to

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(5.83 x 8.27 in. to

8.5 x 14 in.)

X

X

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

X

X

1

1

1

1

2

2

1

2

1

1

2

2

2

2

X

X

X

X

X

X

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

5

Universal

7

76.2 x 127 mm

(3 x 5 in.) to

215.9 x 1219.2 mm

(8.5 x 48 in.)

7 3/4 Envelope

(Monarch)

98.4 x 190.5 mm

(3.875 x 7.5 in.)

X

X

X

X

X

2

X

X

2

2

X

X

X

2

X

X

1

Source supports paper size with size sensing.

2

Source supports paper size without size sensing.

3

Paper size is supported if set to US.

4

Paper size is supported if set to metric.

5

Paper size is supported if its length is between 8.27 in. (210 mm) and 14 in. (355.6 mm); and its width is between 5.5 in. (139.7 mm) and 8.5 in. (215.9 mm) in short

‑edge loading orientation.

6

This size setting formats the envelope for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software program.

7

Turn Size Sensing off to support universal sizes that are close to standard media sizes.

Paper and specialty media guidelines 130

Paper size and dimension

Standard

550

sheet tray

Optional

550

sheet tray

Optional

550

sheet

specialty media drawer

Optional

2,000

sheet

high

capacity

feeder

2

X

Multipurpose feeder

Manual paper

Manual envelope

Duplex

9 Envelope

98.4 x 226.1 mm

(3.875 x 8.9 in.)

Com 10 Envelope

104.8 x 241.3 mm

(4.12 x 9.5 in.)

DL Envelope

110 x 220 mm

(4.33 x 8.66 in.)

C5 Envelope

162 x 229 mm

(6.38 x 9.01 in.)

B5 Envelope

176 x 250 mm

(6.93 x 9.84 in.)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

1

1

1

2

X

X

X

X

2

2

2

2

2

X

X

X

X

X

2

2

2

2

2

X

X

X

X

X

Other Envelope

6

85.7 x 165 mm to

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(3.375 x 6.50 in. to

8.5 x 14 in.)

X X

2

X

2

X

2

X

1

Source supports paper size with size sensing.

2

Source supports paper size without size sensing.

3

Paper size is supported if set to US.

4

Paper size is supported if set to metric.

5

Paper size is supported if its length is between 8.27 in. (210 mm) and 14 in. (355.6 mm); and its width is between 5.5 in. (139.7 mm) and 8.5 in. (215.9 mm) in short

‑edge loading orientation.

6

This size setting formats the envelope for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software program.

7

Turn Size Sensing off to support universal sizes that are close to standard media sizes.

Supported paper types and weights

The printer supports 60–220

‑g/m

2

(16–58

‑lb) paper weights.

Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.

Paper and specialty media guidelines

Paper type

Paper

Plain

Bond

Colored

Letterhead

Preprinted

Light

Glossy

Heavy

Heavy Glossy

Recycled

Card stock

Transparencies

Labels

Paper

Vinyl

Envelopes

Custom Type [x]

Rough/Cotton

X

Standard or optional

550

sheet tray

Optional

550

sheet

specialty media drawer

Optional

2,000

sheet

high

capacity

feeder

Multipurpose feeder

Manual Paper Manual

Envelope

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

Duplex

X

X

X

X

131

Understanding printer menus

Understanding printer menus

Menus list

Supplies Menu

Replace Supply

Cyan Cartridge

Magenta Cartridge

Yellow Cartridge

Black Cartridge

Cyan Photoconductor

Magenta Photoconductor

Yellow Photoconductor

Black Photoconductor

Waste Toner Bottle

Fuser

Transfer Module

Paper Menu

Default Source

Paper Size/Type

Configure MP

Substitute Size

Paper Texture

Paper Weight

Paper Loading

Custom Types

Universal Setup

Reports

Menu Settings Page

Device Statistics

Network Setup Page

Network [x] Setup Page

Profiles List

Print Fonts

Print Directory

Asset Report

Settings

General Settings

Flash Drive Menu

Print Settings

Security

Miscellaneous Security Settings

Confidential Print

Disk Wiping

1

Security Audit Log

Set Date and Time

Network/Ports

Active NIC

Standard Network or Network [x]

2

Standard USB

Parallel [x]

Serial [x]

SMTP Setup

Help

Print All Guides

Color Quality

Print Quality

Printing Guide

Media Guide

Print Defects Guide

Menu Map

Information Guide

Connection Guide

Moving Guide

Supplies Guide

1

This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.

2

Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network, Wireless Network or Network [x].

132

Understanding printer menus

Supplies menu

Use

Replace Supply

All

1

All Photoconductors

2

Cyan Photoconductor

Magenta Photoconductor

Yellow Photoconductor

Black Photoconductor

Cyan Cartridge

Early Warning

Low

Invalid

Near End of Life

Replace

Missing

Defective

OK

Unsupported

Magenta Cartridge

Early Warning

Low

Invalid

Near End of Life

Replace

Missing

Defective

OK

Unsupported

To

Reset the supply counter for the replacement photoconductor or for all photoconductors.

Select Yes to reset the supply counter.

Select No to exit.

Note: Reset the supply counter manually after replacing a photoconductor.

Show the status of the cyan toner cartridge.

Show the status of the magenta toner cartridge.

Yellow Cartridge

Early Warning

Low

Invalid

Near End of Life

Replace

Missing

Defective

OK

Unsupported

1

This menu appears only in non

‑touch‑screen printer models.

2

This menu appears only in touch

‑screen printer models.

Show the status of the yellow toner cartridge.

133

Understanding printer menus

Use

Black Cartridge

Early Warning

Low

Invalid

Near End of Life

Replace

Missing

Defective

OK

Unsupported

Cyan Photoconductor

Early Warning

Low

Replace

Missing

OK

To

Show the status of the black toner cartridge.

Show the status of the cyan photoconductor.

Magenta Photoconductor

Early Warning

Low

Replace

Missing

OK

Yellow Photoconductor

Early Warning

Low

Replace

Missing

OK

Show the status of the magenta photoconductor.

Show the status of the yellow photoconductor.

Black Photoconductor

Early Warning

Low

Replace

Missing

OK

Show the status of the black photoconductor.

Waste Toner Bottle

Near Full

Replace

Missing

OK

1

This menu appears only in non

‑touch‑screen printer models.

2

This menu appears only in touch

‑screen printer models.

Show the status of the waste toner bottle.

134

Understanding printer menus

Use

Fuser

Early Warning

Low

Replace

Missing

OK

To

Show the status of the fuser.

Transfer Module

Early Warning

Low

Replace

Missing

OK

1

This menu appears only in non

‑touch‑screen printer models.

2

This menu appears only in touch

‑screen printer models.

Show the status of the transfer module.

Paper menu

Default Source menu

Use

Default Source

Tray [x]

MP Feeder

Manual Paper

Manual Envelope

To

Set a default paper source for all print jobs.

Notes:

Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.

From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for

MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.

Paper Size/Type menu

Use To

Tray [x] Size

A4

A5

JIS B5

Letter

Legal

Executive

Oficio (México)

Folio

Universal

Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.

Notes:

Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.

The factory default setting depends on the value of Paper Sizes in the

General Settings menu.

For trays with automatic paper size sensing, only the size detected by the tray appears.

135

Understanding printer menus 136

Use

Tray [x] Type

Plain Paper

Card Stock

Transparency

Recycled

Glossy

Heavy Glossy

Labels

Vinyl Labels

Bond

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored Paper

Light Paper

Heavy Paper

Rough/Cotton

Custom Type [x]

To

Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.

Notes:

Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is

the factory default setting for all other trays.

If available, a user

‑defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].

Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking.

MP Feeder Size

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5

Letter

Legal

Executive

Oficio (México)

Folio

Statement

Universal

7 3/4 Envelope

9 Envelope

10 Envelope

DL Envelope

C5 Envelope

B5 Envelope

Other Envelope

Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

Notes:

Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.

Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.

From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for

MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item.

Understanding printer menus 137

Use

MP Feeder Type

Plain Paper

Card Stock

Transparency

Recycled

Glossy

Heavy Glossy

Labels

Vinyl Labels

Bond

Envelope

Rough Envelope

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored Paper

Light Paper

Heavy Paper

Rough/Cotton

Custom Type [x]

To

Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder

Notes:

Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting.

From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for

MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu item.

Manual Paper Size

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5

Letter

Legal

Executive

Oficio (México)

Folio

Statement

Universal

Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.

Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.

Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Manual Paper Type

Plain Paper

Card Stock

Transparency

Recycled

Glossy

Heavy Glossy

Labels

Vinyl Labels

Bond

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored Paper

Light Paper

Heavy Paper

Roug/Cotton

Custom Type [x]

Manual Envelope Size

7 3/4 Envelope

9 Envelope

10 Envelope

DL Envelope

C5 Envelope

B5 Envelope

Other Envelope

To

Specify the type of paper being manually loaded.

Note: Plain paper is the factory default setting.

Specify the size of the envelope being manually loaded.

Note: 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting. DL Envelope is the international factory default setting.

Manual Envelope Type

Envelope

Rough Envelope

Custom Type [x]

Specify the type of envelope being manually loaded.

Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.

Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.

Configure MP menu

Use

Configure MP

Cassette

Manual

First

To

Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.

Notes:

Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.

Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual

‑feed print jobs.

First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.

138

Understanding printer menus

Substitute Size menu

Use

Substitute Size

Off

Statement/A5

Letter/A4

All Listed

To

Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.

Notes:

All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are allowed.

Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.

Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change

Paper

appearing.

Paper Texture menu

Use

Plain Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Card Stock Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Transparency Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Recycled Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Glossy Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Heavy Glossy Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Labels Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

To

Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.

Notes:

Normal is the factory default setting.

The options appear only if card stock is supported.

Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.

Specify the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the heavy glossy paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

139

Understanding printer menus

Use

Vinyl Labels Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Bond Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Envelope Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Rough Envelope Texture

Rough

Letterhead Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Preprinted Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Colored Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Light Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Heavy Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Rough/Cotton Texture

Rough

Custom [x] Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

To

Specify the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.

Note: Rough is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.

Note: Rough is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.

Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.

Notes:

Normal is the factory default setting.

The options appear only if custom type is supported.

140

Understanding printer menus

Paper Weight menu

Use

Plain Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Card Stock Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Transparency Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Recycled Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Glossy Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Heavy Glossy Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Labels Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Vinyl Labels Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Bond Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Envelope Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

To

Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the heavy glossy paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

141

Understanding printer menus 142

Use

Rough Envelope Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Letterhead Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Preprinted Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Colored Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Light Weight

Light

Heavy Weight

Heavy

Rough/Cotton Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Custom [x] Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

To

Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded.

Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded.

Specify the relative weight of the cotton paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.

Notes:

Normal is the factory default setting.

The options appear only when the custom type is supported.

Paper Loading menu

Use

Card Stock Loading

Duplex

Off

Notes:

To

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Card Stock as the paper type.

Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menus.

Duplex sets the printer default to two

‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from the

Print Properties settings in Windows or from the Print Dialog settings in Macintosh.

If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one

‑sided print jobs.

Understanding printer menus 143

Use

Recycled Loading

Duplex

Off

Glossy Loading

Duplex

Off

Heavy Glossy Loading

Off

Duplex

Labels Loading

Off

Duplex

Vinyl Labels Loading

Off

Duplex

Bond Loading

Duplex

Off

Letterhead Loading

Duplex

Off

Preprinted Loading

Duplex

Off

Colored Loading

Duplex

Off

Light Loading

Duplex

Off

Heavy Loading

Duplex

Off

Rough/Cotton Loading

Duplex

Off

Notes:

To

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Recycled as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Glossy as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Heavy Glossy as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Labels as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Vinyl Labels as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Bond as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Letterhead as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Preprinted as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Colored as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Light as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Heavy as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Rough or Cotton as the paper type.

Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menus.

Duplex sets the printer default to two

‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from the

Print Properties settings in Windows or from the Print Dialog settings in Macintosh.

If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one

‑sided print jobs.

Understanding printer menus 144

Use

Custom [x] Loading

Duplex

Off

To

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Custom [x] as the paper type.

Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only if the custom paper type is supported.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menus.

Duplex sets the printer default to two

‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from the

Print Properties settings in Windows or from the Print Dialog settings in Macintosh.

If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one

‑sided print jobs.

Custom Types menu

Use

Custom Type [x]

Paper

Card Stock

Transparency

Glossy

Labels

Vinyl Labels

Envelope

Recycled

Paper

Card Stock

Transparency

Glossy

Labels

Vinyl Labels

Envelope

To

Associate a paper or specialty media type with a user

‑defined custom name created in the Embedded Web Server or in MarkVision

TM

Professional.

Notes:

Paper is the factory default setting.

The custom paper type must be supported in the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.

Specify a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus.

Notes:

Paper is the factory default setting.

The custom paper type must be supported in the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.

Custom Names menu

Use

Custom Name [x]

To

Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces the Custom Type [x] name in the printer menus.

Note: This menu item appears only in touch

‑screen printer models.

Understanding printer menus

Universal Setup menu

Use

Units of Measure

Inches

Millimeters

Portrait Width

3–48 inches

76–1219 mm

Portrait Height

3–48 inches

76–1219 mm

Feed Direction

Short Edge

Long Edge

145

To

Specify the unit of measure.

Note: Inches is the US factory default setting. Millimeters is the international factory default setting.

Set the width for a portrait page orientation.

Notes:

8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. 216 mm is the international factory default setting.

If the specified width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum width allowed.

The width can be increased in 0.01-inch or in 1-mm increments.

Set the height for a portrait page orientation.

Notes:

14 inches is the US factory default setting. 356 mm is the international factory default setting.

If the specified height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum height allowed.

The height can be increased in 0.01-inch or in 1-mm increments.

Specify the feed direction.

Notes:

Short Edge is the factory default setting.

Long Edge appears only when the paper or specialty media can be loaded in either direction.

Reports menu

Reports menu

Use

Menu Settings Page

Device Statistics

Network Setup Page

To

Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, printer control panel language,

TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other information.

Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages.

Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address information.

Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected to print servers.

Understanding printer menus 146

Use

Network [x] Setup Page

Profiles List

Print Fonts

PCL Fonts

PostScript Fonts

Print Directory

Asset Report

To

Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address information.

Notes:

This menu item is available when more than one network option is installed.

This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected to print servers.

Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.

Note: This menu item appears only when LDSS is enabled.

Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer.

Note: A separate list is available for PCL and PostScript emulations.

Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or printer hard disk.

Notes:

Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.

Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed correctly and working properly.

This menu item appears only when a flash and/or disk option is installed.

Print a report containing printer asset information, such as serial number and model name.

Network/Ports menu

Active NIC menu

Use

Active NIC

Auto

[list of available network cards]

To

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting.

This menu item appears only when an optional network card is installed.

Standard Network or Network [x] menus

Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.

Understanding printer menus 147

Use

PCL SmartSwitch

On

Off

PS SmartSwitch

On

Off

NPA Mode

Off

Auto

Network Buffer

Auto

3KB to [maximum size allowed]

Job Buffering

Off

On

Auto

To

Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.

Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.

Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting.

Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Set the size of the network input buffer.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting.

The value can be changed in 1

‑KB increments.

The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or

Off.

To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.

Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only appears when a formatted disk is installed.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.

Auto buffers print jobs only when the printer is busy processing data from another input port.

Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Understanding printer menus 148

Use

Mac Binary PS

On

Off

Auto

To

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting.

Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.

On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.

Display and set the printer network settings.

Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network.

Standard Network Setup OR

Network [x] Setup

Reports

Network Card

TCP/IP

IPv6

Wireless

AppleTalk

Reports menu

To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:

Network/Ports menu > Networks/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports

Network/Ports menu > Networks/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports

Use To

Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.

Network Card menu

To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:

Network/Ports menu > Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card

Network/Ports menu > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card

Use

View Card Status

Connected

Disconnected

View Card Speed

Network Address

UAA

LAA

To

View the connection status of the network card.

View the speed of an active network card.

View the network addresses.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Job Timeout

0, 10–255 seconds

To

Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.

Notes:

90 seconds is the factory default setting.

A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.

If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.

Allow the printer to print a banner page.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Banner Page

Off

On

Netmask

Gateway

Enable DHCP

On

Off

Enable RARP

On

Off

Enable BOOTP

On

Off

Enable Auto IP

Yes

No

TCP/IP menu

Note: This menu is available only in network models or printers attached to print servers.

To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:

Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup >TCP/IP

Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup >TCP/IP

Use

Activate

On

Off

Set Hostname

To

Activate or deactivate TCP/IP.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

IP Address

Set the current TCP/IP host name.

Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.

View or change the current TCP/IP address.

Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP.

View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.

View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.

Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Specify the RARP address assignment setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

149

Understanding printer menus 150

Use

Enable FTP/TFTP

Yes

No

Enable HTTP Server

Yes

No

WINS Server Address

Enable DDNS

Yes

No

Enable mDNS

Yes

No

DNS Server Address

Enable HTTPS

Yes

No

To

Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer

Protocol.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, you can monitor and manage the printer remotely using a Web browser.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

View or change the current WINS server address.

View or change the current DDNS setting

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

View or change the current mDNS setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

View or change the current DNS server address.

View or change the current HTTPS setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

IPv6 menu

To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:

Network/Ports menu > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup >IPv6

Network/Ports menu > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6

Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.

Use

Enable IPv6

On

Off

Auto Configuration

On

Off

Set Hostname

View Address

View Router Address

Enable DHCPv6

On

Off

To

Enable IPv6 in the printer.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Set the host name.

Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web

Server.

Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus 151

Wireless menu

Note: This menu is available only in printer models connected to a wireless network.

To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:

Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup >Wireless

Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless

Use

Wi

Fi Protected Setup (WPS)

Start Push Button Method

Start PIN Method

Enable/Disable WPS Auto

detection

Enable

Disable

Network Mode

Infrastructure

Ad hoc

To

Establish a wireless network and enable network security.

Notes:

Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless network by pressing buttons on both the printer and the access point (wireless router) within a given period of time.

Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network by using a PIN on the printer and entering it into the wireless settings of the access point.

Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with

WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.

Note: Disable is the factory default setting.

Specify the network mode.

Notes:

Ad hoc is the factory default setting. This configures wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer.

Infrastructure lets the printer access a network using an access point.

Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.

Note: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.

Compatibility

802.11b/g

802.11b/g/n

Choose Network

View Signal Quality

View Security Mode

Select an available network for the printer to use.

View the quality of the wireless connection.

View the encryption method for the wireless network.

AppleTalk menu

Note: This menu is available only in printer models connected to a wired network or when an optional network card is installed.

To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:

Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk

Network/Ports > Network Setup [x] > AppleTalk

Understanding printer menus 152

Use

Activate

Yes

No

View Name

To

Enable or disable AppleTalk support.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

View Address

Show the assigned AppleTalk name.

Note: The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.

Show the assigned AppleTalk address.

Note: The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.

Set Zone

[list of zones available on the network]

Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.

Note: The factory default setting is the default zone for the network. If no default zone exists, then the zone marked with an asterisk (*) is the default setting.

Standard USB menu

Use

PCL SmartSwitch

On

Off

PS SmartSwitch

On

Off

NPA Mode

On

Off

Auto

To

Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses

PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to

Off.

Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses

PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.

Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data, determine the format, and then process it appropriately.

The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.

Understanding printer menus 153

Use

USB Buffer

Disabled

Auto

3K to [maximum size allowed]

Job Buffering

Off

On

Auto

Mac Binary PS

On

Off

Auto

ENA Address

yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

ENA Netmask

yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

ENA Gateway

yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

To

Set the size of the USB input buffer.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting.

Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.

The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.

The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or

Off.

To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.

The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.

Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.

Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.

Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting.

On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.

Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.

Set the network address information for an external print server.

Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.

Set the netmask information for an external print server.

Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.

Set the gateway information for an external print server.

Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.

Parallel [x] menu

Note: This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed.

Understanding printer menus 154

Use

PCL SmartSwitch

On

Off

PS SmartSwitch

On

Off

NPA Mode

On

Off

Auto

Parallel Buffer

Disabled

Auto

3K to [maximum size allowed]

Job Buffering

Off

On

Auto

To

Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses

PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.

Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses

PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.

Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting.

Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Set the size of the parallel input buffer.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting.

Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.

The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1

‑KB increments.

The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or

Off.

To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.

Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.

Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.

Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Understanding printer menus 155

Use

Advanced Status

On

Off

Protocol

Standard

Fastbytes

Honor Init

On

Off

Parallel Mode 2

On

Off

Mac Binary PS

On

Off

Auto

ENA Address

yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

ENA Netmask

yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

ENA Gateway

yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

To

Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

Off disables parallel port negotiation.

Specify the parallel port protocol.

Notes:

Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.

Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.

Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the computer.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on.

Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a strobe.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting.

Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.

On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.

Set the network address information for an external print server.

Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.

Set the netmask information for an external print server.

Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.

Set the gateway information for an external print server.

Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.

Serial [x] menu

Note: This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed.

Understanding printer menus 156

Use

PCL SmartSwitch

On

Off

PS SmartSwitch

On

Off

NPA Mode

On

Off

Auto

Serial Buffer

Disabled

Auto

3K to [maximum size allowed]

To

Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses

PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.

Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses

PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.

Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data, determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.

When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA format, it is rejected as bad data.

When set to Off, the printer does not perform NPA processing.

Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Set the size of the serial input buffer.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting.

Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.

The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1

‑KB increments.

The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or

Off.

To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.

Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Baud

1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

38400

57600

115200

138200

172800

230400

345600

Data Bits

7

8

Understanding printer menus

Use

Job Buffering

Off

On

Auto

Protocol

DTR

DTR/DSR

XON/XOFF

XON/XOFF/DTR

XONXOFF/DTRDSR

Robust XON

On

Off

157

To

Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting. The printer does not buffer print jobs on the printer hard disk.

On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.

Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.

Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port.

Notes:

DTR is the factory default setting.

DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.

XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.

XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings.

Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to

XON/XOFF.

Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port.

Notes:

9600 is the factory default setting.

138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the

Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1,

Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.

Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame.

Note: 8 is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus 158

Use

Parity

Even

Odd

None

Ignore

Honor DSR

On

Off

To

Set the parity for serial input and output data frames.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses

DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing.

SMTP Setup menu

Use

Primary SMTP Gateway

Primary SMTP Gateway Port

Secondary SMTP Gateway

Secondary SMTP Gateway Port

SMTP Timeout

5–30

To

Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.

Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.

Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to send an e

‑mail.

Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.

Reply Address

Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the printer.

Use SSL

Disabled

Negotiate

Required

Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the

SMTP server.

Notes:

SMTP Server Authentication

No authentication required

Login/Plain

CRAM

‑MD5

Digest

‑MD5

NTLM

Kerberos 5

Disabled is the factory default setting.

When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if

SSL will be used.

Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e

‑mail privileges.

Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.

*

This menu appears only in touch

‑screen printer models.

Understanding printer menus 159

Use

Device

Initiated Email

None

Use Device SMTP Credentials

User

Initiated Email

*

None

Use Device SMTP Credentials

Use Session User ID & Password

Use Session E

‑mail address & Password

Prompt User

Device Userid

Device Password

Kerberos 5 Realm

NTLM Domain

*

This menu appears only in touch

‑screen printer models.

To

Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.

Notes:

None is the factory default setting for Device

‑Initiated E‑mail and

User

‑Initiated E‑mail.

Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.

Security menu

Miscellaneous Security Settings menu

Use

Login Restriction

Login failures

1–10

Failure time frame

1–60

Lockout time

1–60

Panel Login Timeout

1–900

Remote Login Timeout

1–120

To

Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control panel before all users are locked out.

Notes:

“Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out. 3 is the factory default setting.

“Failure time frame” specifies the time frame in minutes when failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out. 5 is the factory default setting.

“Lockout time” specifies how many minutes users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit. 5 is the factory default setting.

Panel Login Timeout specifies how many minutes the printer remains idle on the home screen before automatically logging the user off. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.

Remote Login Timeout specifies how many minutes a remote interface (for example, a Web page) can remain idle before automatically logging the user off. 10 is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus 160

Confidential Print menu

Use

Max Invalid PIN

Off

2–10

To

Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.

Notes:

This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.

Once the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.

Confidential Job Expiration

Off

1 hour

4 hours

24 hours

1 week

Limit the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted.

Notes:

If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside in the printer RAM or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value.

If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer RAM are deleted.

Repeat Job Expiration

Off

1 hour

4 hours

24 hours

1 week

Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.

Verify Job Expiration

Off

1 hour

4 hours

24 hours

1 week

Reserve Job Expiration

Off

1 hour

4 hours

24 hours

1 week

Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.

Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Disk Wiping menu

Disk Wiping erases only print job data in the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All permanent data in the printer hard disk are retained, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.

Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.

Understanding printer menus 161

Use

Wiping Mode

Auto

Manual

Off

Manual Wiping

Start now

Do not start now

Automatic Method

Single pass

Multiple pass

Manual Method

Single pass

Multiple pass

To

Specify the mode for disk wiping.

Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer determines when to initiate a disk wipe.

Overwrite the disk space that has been used to hold data from a processed print job.

This type of wiping does not erase any information related to an unprocessed print job.

Notes:

“Do not start now“ is the factory default setting.

If the Disk Wiping access control is activated, then a user must successfully authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk wipe.

Mark the disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.

Notes:

“Single pass” is the factory default setting.

Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to turn the printer off for an extended amount of time.

Wipe highly confidential information using only the Multiple pass method.

Allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first.

Notes:

“Single pass” is the factory default setting.

Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass method only.

Allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first.

Note: “Single pass” is the factory default setting.

Scheduled Method

Single pass

Multiple pass

Security Audit Log menu

Use

Export Log

Delete Log

Yes

No

To

Enable an authorized user to export the audit log.

Notes:

To export the audit log from the printer control panel, attach a flash drive into the printer.

From the Embedded Web Server, download the audit log into a computer.

Specify whether audit logs are deleted.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus 162

Use

Configure Log

Enable Audit

Yes

No

Enable Remote Syslog

No

Yes

Remote Syslog Facility

0–23

Severity of events to log

0–7

To

Specify whether and how audit logs are created.

Notes:

Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and remote syslog. Yes is the factory default setting.

Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the factory default setting.

Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.

Severity of events to log records the severity value of each event. 4 is the factory default setting.

Set Date and Time menu

Set Date and Time menu items and descriptions

Use

Current Date and Time

Manually Set Date and Time

[input date/time]

Time Zone

[list of time zones]

Automatically observe DST

On

Off

Enable NTP

On

Off

To

Show the current date and time settings for the printer.

Enter the date and time.

Notes:

For touch

‑screen printer models, date and time are set in YYYY-MM-DD

HH:MM format.

Manually setting the date and time sets Enable NTP to No.

For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, a wizard allows you to set the date and time in YYYY

‑MM‑DD‑HH:MM.

Select the time zone.

Note: GMT is the factory default setting.

Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times associated with the printer Time Zone setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

The setting is turned off if you manually set the date and time.

Understanding printer menus 163

Settings menu

General Settings menu

Use To

Display Language

English

Francais

Deutsch

Italiano

Espanol

Dansk

Norsk

Nederlands

Svenska

Portuguese

Suomi

Russian

Polski

Greek

Magyar

Turkce

Cesky

Simplified Chinese

Traditional Chinese

Korean

Japanese

Eco

Mode

Off

Energy

Energy/Paper

Paper

Set the language of the text appearing on the display.

Note: Not all languages are available for all printers, and you may need to install special hardware for those languages to appear.

Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.

Notes:

For touch

‑screen printer models, touch EcoMode, and then select from the options.

Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to its factory default settings.

Energy minimizes the power used by the printer.

Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.

Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power, paper and specialty media.

Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job by duplexing each page.

Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.

1

This menu appears only in non

‑touch‑screen printer models.

2

This menu appears only in touch

‑screen printer models.

Understanding printer menus 164

Use

Quiet Mode

Off

On

To

Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer.

Notes:

For touch

‑screen printer models, touch Quiet Mode, and then select from the options.

Off is the factory default setting. This setting supports the performance specifications of your printer and allows for optimal printing of color

‑rich documents.

On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible.

Run Initial setup

Yes

No

Run the setup wizard.

Notes:

Yes is the factory default setting.

After completing the setup wizard, the default setting becomes No.

Keyboard

2

Keyboard Type

English

Francais

Francais Canadien

Deutsch

Italiano

Espanol

Greek

Dansk

Norsk

Nederlands

Svenska

Suomi

Portuguese

Russian

Polski

Swiss German

Swiss French

Korean

Magyar

Turkce

Cesky

Simplified Chinese

Traditional Chinese

Japanese

Custom Key 1

Specify the language for the printer control panel keyboard.

Notes:

1

This menu appears only in non

‑touch‑screen printer models.

2

This menu appears only in touch

‑screen printer models.

Keyboard Type specifies the language for the printer control panel keyboard.

Custom Key 1 allows the user to assign a value to a custom key setting. A maximum of 6 characters is allowed.

Not all languages are available for all printers, and you may need to install special hardware for those languages to appear.

Understanding printer menus 165

Use

Paper Sizes

US

Metric

Displayed Information

2

Left side

Right side

Custom Text [x]

[x] Toner

Fuser

Transfer Module

To

Specify the default paper measurement.

Notes:

US is the factory default setting.

The initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard.

Changing this also changes the default setting for each input source in the Paper Size/Type menu.

Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the home screen.

For the “Left side” and “Right side” menus, select from the following options:

None

IP Address

Hostname

Contact Name

Location

Date/Time mDNS/DDNS Service Name

Zero Configuration Name

Custom Text [x]

Model Name

For the [x] Toner, [x] Fuser, and Transfer Module menus, select from the following options:

When to display

Do not display

Display

Message to Display

Default

Alternate

Default

[text entry]

Alternate

[text entry]

Notes:

IP Address is the factory default setting for “Left side.”

Date/Time is the factory default setting for “Right side.”

“Do not display” is the factory default setting for “When to display.”

Default is the factory default setting for Message to

Display.

1

This menu appears only in non

‑touch‑screen printer models.

2

This menu appears only in touch

‑screen printer models.

Understanding printer menus 166

Use

Displayed Information

2

Waste Toner Bottle

Paper Jam

Load Paper

Service Errors

To

Customize the displayed information for Waste Toner Bottle,

Paper Jam, Load Paper, and Service Errors.

Select from the following options:

Display

No

Yes

Message to Display

Default

Alternate

Default

[text entry]

Alternate

[text entry]

Notes:

No is the factory default setting for Display.

Default is the factory default setting for Message to

Display.

Home screen customization

Change Language

Search Held Jobs

Held Jobs

USB Drive

Profiles and Solutions

2

Bookmarks

Jobs by user

Forms and Favorites

2

Eco

‑Settings

2

Showroom

2

Change Background

2

Add or remove icons and buttons that appear on the home screen.

For each icon or button, select from the following options:

Display

Notes:

Do Not Display

Display is the factory default setting for Search Held Jobs,

Held Jobs, USB Drive, Forms and Favorites, Eco

‑Settings,

Showroom, and Change Background.

Do Not Display is the factory default setting for Change

Language, Profiles and Solutions, Bookmarks, and Jobs by user.

Date Format

2

[MM

‑DD‑YYYY]

[DD

‑MM‑YYYY]

[YYYY

‑MM‑DD]

Time Format

2

12 hour A.M./P.M.

24 hour clock

Specify the format for the printer date.

Note: [MM

‑DD‑YYYY] is the US factory default setting.

[DD

‑MM‑YYYY] is the international factory default setting.

Specify the format for the printer time.

Note: “12 hour A.M./P.M.” is the factory default setting.

Screen Brightness

20–100

2

Specify the brightness of the printer control panel screen.

Note: 100 is the factory default setting.

1

This menu appears only in non

‑touch‑screen printer models.

2

This menu appears only in touch

‑screen printer models.

Understanding printer menus 167

Use

Audio Feedback

2

Button Feedback

On

Off

Volume

1–10

Show Bookmarks

2

Yes

No

To

Set the audio volume for the buttons.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.

5 is the factory default setting for Volume.

Determine whether the Bookmarks icon is displayed.

Notes:

Web Page Refresh Rate

2

30–300

Yes is the factory default setting.

The Bookmarks icon appears in the Held Jobs area. If Show

Bookmarks is set to No, then the Held Jobs icon is displayed only on the home screen if one or more held jobs exist on the printer.

Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes.

Note: 120 seconds is the factory default setting.

Specify a contact name for the printer.

Contact Name

2

Location

2

Alarms

Alarm Control

Cartridge Alarm

Specify the location of the printer.

Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.

Set an alarm to sound when the printer requires user intervention.

For each alarm type, select from the following options:

Off

Single

Continuous

Notes:

For touch

‑screen printer models, touch Cartridge Alarm, and then select from the options.

Single is the factory default setting. This setting sets the alarm as three quick beeps.

Off means no alarm will sound.

Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.

Timeouts

Standby Mode

2

Disabled

1–240

Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the system enters a lower power state.

Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.

1

This menu appears only in non

‑touch‑screen printer models.

2

This menu appears only in touch

‑screen printer models.

Understanding printer menus 168

Use

Timeouts

Sleep Mode

Disabled

1–180

Timeouts

Screen Timeout

15–300

Timeouts

Print Timeout

Disabled

1–255

To

Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before some systems begin entering a minimum power state.

Notes:

30 minutes is the factory default setting.

A lower setting conserves more energy, but may require longer warm

‑up times.

Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting.

Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm

‑up time.

Sleep Mode does not interact with Standby Mode.

Set the amount of time (in seconds) the printer waits before returning to a ready state.

Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.

Set the amount of time (in seconds) the printer waits to receive an end

‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the print job.

Notes:

Timeouts

Wait Timeout

Disabled

15–65535

Timeouts

Job Hold Timeout

5–255

90 seconds is the factory default setting.

When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting.

Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.

This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.

Set the amount of time (in seconds) the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print job

Notes:

40 seconds is the factory default setting.

Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using

PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs.

Set the amount of time (in seconds) the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to process other jobs in the print queue.

Notes:

30 seconds is the factory default setting.

This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.

1

This menu appears only in non

‑touch‑screen printer models.

2

This menu appears only in touch

‑screen printer models.

Understanding printer menus 169

Use

Print Recovery

Auto Continue

Disabled

5–255

Print Recovery

Jam Recovery

On

Off

Auto

To

Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time period.

Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.

Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.

Notes:

Print Recovery

Page Protect

Off

On

Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks.

On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.

Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.

Let the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.

On sets the printer to process the whole page so the entire page prints.

Press Sleep Button

Do Nothing

Sleep

Hibernate

Determine how the printer, while in Idle state, reacts to a short press of the Sleep button.

Notes:

Sleep is the factory default setting. This setting sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration.

Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configurations.

Do Nothing ignores a short press of the Sleep button.

Press and Hold Sleep Button

Do Nothing

Sleep

Hibernate

Determine how the printer, while in Idle state, reacts to a long press of the Sleep button.

Notes:

1

This menu appears only in non

‑touch‑screen printer models.

2

This menu appears only in touch

‑screen printer models.

Do Nothing is the factory default setting. This setting ignores a long press of the Sleep button.

Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration.

Understanding printer menus 170

Use

Factory Defaults

Do Not Restore

Restore Now

To

Return the printer settings to the factory default settings.

Notes:

Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. This keeps the user

‑defined settings.

Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.

Custom Home Message

1

Off

IP Address

Hostname

Contact Name

Location

Zero Configuration Name

Custom Text 1

Display information pertaining to the selected Custom Home

Messages on the printer control panel display.

1

This menu appears only in non

‑touch‑screen printer models.

2

This menu appears only in touch

‑screen printer models.

Flash Drive menu

Note: This menu appears only in touch

‑screen printer models.

Use

Copies

1–999

To

Specify a default number of copies for each print job.

Note: 1 is the factory default setting.

Set a default paper source for all print jobs.

Note: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.

Paper Source

Tray [x]

MP Feeder

Manual Paper

Manual Envelope

Color

Color

Black Only

Collate

Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)

On (1,2,1,2,1,2)

Sides (Duplex)

1 sided

2 sided

Generate color outputs.

Note: Color is the factory default setting.

Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the paper.

Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Duplex Binding

Long Edge

Short Edge

Paper Saver Orientation

Auto

Landscape

Portrait

Paper Saver

Off

2

‑Up

3

‑Up

4

‑Up

6

‑Up

9

‑Up

12

‑Up

16

‑Up

Paper Saver Border

None

Solid

Paper Saver Ordering

Horizontal

Reverse Horizontal

Reverse Vertical

Vertical

Separator Sheets

Off

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Between Pages

To

Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to paper orientation.

Notes:

Long Edge is the factory default setting. Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).

Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).

Specify the orientation of a multiple

‑page document.

Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.

Specify that multiple

‑page images be printed on one side of a paper.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.

Print a border on each page image.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

171

Specify the positioning of multiple

‑page images.

Notes:

Horizontal is the factory default setting.

Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation.

Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting. No separator sheets are included in the print job.

Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if

Collation is set to On. If Collation is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page

2's.

Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.

Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages in a document for notes.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Separator Sheet Source

Tray [x]

Manual Feeder

To

Specify the paper source for separator sheets.

Notes:

Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.

From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for

Manual Feeder to appear as a menu setting.

Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.

Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

Blank Pages

Do Not Print

Print

Setup menu

Use

Printer Language

PS Emulation

PCL Emulation

Job Waiting

On

Off

Print Area

Normal

Whole Page

172

To

Set the default printer language.

Notes:

PS Emulation is the factory default printer language. PS emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs.

PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs.

Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language.

Specify if print jobs are removed from the print queue when they require unavailable printer options or custom settings. These print jobs are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When the missing information or options are obtained, the stored jobs print.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

This menu item appears only when a non-read

‑only printer hard disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power.

Set the logical and physical printable area.

Notes:

Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to print data in the non

‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.

Whole Page allows images to be moved into the non

‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary. This setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter.

This setting has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Printer Usage

Max Yield

Max Speed

Black Only Mode

On

Off

Download Target

RAM

Flash

Disk

Resource Save

On

Off

Print All Order

Alphabetical

Oldest First

Newest First

173

To

Set the printer for a faster print speed or a higher toner yield.

Note: Max Yield is the factory default setting.

Set the printer to print text and graphics using only the black toner cartridge.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Set the storage location for downloads.

Notes:

RAM is the factory default setting. Downloads stored in RAM are temporary.

Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off.

This menu item appears only when a flash or printer hard disk is installed.

The menu setting reverts to its factory default value after each power

‑on reset (POR).

Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a print job that requires more memory than is available.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.

On sets the printer to retain downloads during language changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, 38 Memory Full appears, but downloads are not deleted.

Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All Order is selected.

Notes:

Alphabetical is the factory default setting.

Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.

Understanding printer menus

Finishing menu

Use

Sides (Duplex)

1 sided

2 sided

Duplex Binding

Long Edge

Short Edge

Copies

1–999

Blank Pages

Do Not Print

Print

Collate

Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)

On (1,2,1,2,1,2)

Separator Sheets

Off

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Between Pages

Separator Source

Tray [x]

Manual Feeder

174

To

Specify whether two

‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.

Notes:

1 sided is the factory default setting.

When two-sided printing is selected and the media is not the same on both sides, the media must be loaded in the trays in a different orientation.

When two-sided printing is selected and the media is not the same on both sides, the media must be loaded in the trays in a different orientation.

You can set two

‑sided printing in the software program. For Windows users, click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For

Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and pop

‑up menus.

Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to paper orientation.

Notes:

Long Edge is the factory default setting. Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).

Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).

Specify the default number of copies for each print job.

Note: 1 is the factory default setting.

Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.

Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

On stacks the print job in sequence.

Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if

Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page

2's.

Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.

Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document.

Specify the paper source for separator sheets.

Note: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Paper Saver

Off

2

‑Up

3

‑Up

4

‑Up

6

‑Up

9

‑Up

12

‑Up

16

‑Up

Paper Saver Ordering

Horizontal

Reverse Horizontal

Reverse Vertical

Vertical

Paper Saver Orientation

Auto

Landscape

Portrait

Paper Saver Border

None

Solid

Quality menu

Use

Print Mode

Color

Black Only

Color Correction

Auto

Off

Manual

Print Resolution

1200 dpi

4800 CQ

To

Specify that multiple

‑page images be printed on one side of a paper.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

The number selected is the number of page images that prints per side.

175

Specify the positioning of multiple

‑page images.

Notes:

Horizontal is the factory default setting.

Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation.

Specify the orientation of a multiple

‑page document.

Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.

Print a border on each page image.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

To

Specify whether images are printed in black and white or in color.

Notes:

Color is the factory default setting.

The printer driver is capable of overriding this setting.

Adjust the color output on the printed page.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting. Auto applies different color conversion tables to each object on the printed page.

Off turns off color correction.

Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available in the Manual Color menu.

Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors, certain colors that appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page.

Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch or color quality (CQ).

Note: 4800 CQ is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Toner Darkness

1–5

Enhance Fine Lines

On

Off

Color Saver

On

Off

RGB Brightness

‑6 to 6

RGB Contrast

0–5

RGB Saturation

0–5

176

To

Lighten or darken the printed output.

Notes:

4 is the factory default setting.

Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.

If Print Mode is set to Black Only, then a setting of 5 increases toner density and darkness to all print jobs.

If Print Mode is set to Color, then a setting of 5 is the same as a setting of 4.

Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical circuit diagrams, and flow charts.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

To set Enhance Fine Lines from the software program, with a document open, click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.

To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server, type the printer IP address in a Web browser.

Reduce the amount of toner used for graphics and images. The amount of toner used for text is not reduced.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

On overrides Toner Darkness settings.

Adjust brightness in color outputs.

Notes:

0 is the factory default setting.

This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.

Adjust contrast in color outputs.

Notes:

0 is the factory default setting.

This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.

Adjust saturation in color outputs.

Notes:

0 is the factory default setting.

This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Color Balance

Cyan

‑5 to 5

Magenta

‑5 to 5

Yellow

‑5 to 5

Black

‑5 to 5

Reset Defaults

Color Samples

sRGB Display sRGB Vivid

Display—True Black

Vivid

Off—RGB

US CMYK

Euro CMYK

Vivid CMYK

Off—CMYK

Manual Color

RGB Image

Vivid sRGB Display

Display True Black sRGB Vivid

Off

RGB Text

Vivid sRGB Display

Display True Black sRGB Vivid

Off

RGB Graphics

Vivid sRGB Display

Display True Black sRGB Vivid

Off

177

To

Adjust color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner used for each color.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Print sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the printer.

Notes:

Selecting any setting prints the sample.

Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK combination that creates the color observed. These pages can be used to help decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed output.

From a browser window, type the IP address of the printer to access a complete list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server.

Customize the RGB color conversions.

Notes:

sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image. This applies a color conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer monitor.

sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics. sRGB

Vivid applies a color table that increases saturation. This is preferred for business graphics and text.

Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter, more saturated colors.

Display True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner for neutral gray colors.

Off turns off color conversion.

Understanding printer menus 178

Use

Manual Color

CMYK Image

US CMYK

Euro CMYK

Vivid CMYK

Off

CMYK Text

US CMYK

Euro CMYK

Vivid CMYK

Off

CMYK Graphics

US CMYK

Euro CMYK

Vivid CMYK

Off

Spot Color Replacement

Color Adjust

To

Customize the CMYK color conversions.

Notes:

US CMYK is the US factory default setting. US CMYK applies a color conversion table that tries to produce output that matches SWOP color output.

Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting. Euro CMYK applies a color conversion table that tries to produce output that matches EuroScale color output.

Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US CMYK color conversion table.

Off turns off color conversion.

Provide the capability to assign specific CMYK values to named spot colors.

Initiate a recalibration of color conversion tables and to allow the printer to make adjustments for color variations in output.

Notes:

Calibrating starts when the menu is selected. Calibrating appears on the display until the process is finished.

Color variations in output sometimes result from changeable conditions such as room temperature and humidity. Color adjustments are made on printer algorithms. Color alignment is also recalibrated in this process.

Job Accounting menu

Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed. Make sure the printer hard disk is not read/write

‑ or write‑protected.

Use To

Job Accounting Log

Off

On

Job Accounting Utilities

Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Accounting Log Frequency

Weekly

Monthly

Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.

Determine and set how often a log file is created.

Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus 179

Use

Log Action at End of Frequency

None

E

‑mail Current Log

E

‑mail & Delete Current Log

Post Current Log

Post & Delete Current Log

Disk Near Full Level

Off

1–99

Disk Near Full Action

None

E

‑mail Current Log

E

‑mail & Delete Current Log

E

‑mail & Delete Oldest Log

Post Current Log

Post & Delete Current Log

Post & Delete Oldest Log

Delete Current Log

Delete Oldest Log

Delete All Logs

Delete All But Current

Disk Full Action

None

E

‑mail & Delete Current Log

E

‑mail & Delete Oldest Log

Post & Delete Current Log

Post & Delete Oldest Log

Delete Current Log

Delete Oldest Log

Delete All Logs

Delete All But Current

URL to Post Logs

E

mail Address to Send Logs

Log File Prefix

To

Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near

Full Action.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full.

Notes:

None is the factory default setting.

The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is triggered.

Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit (100MB).

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.

Specify the e

‑mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs.

Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.

Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log file prefix.

Understanding printer menus

Utilities menu

Use

Remove Held Jobs

Confidential

Held

Not Restored

All

Format Flash

Yes

No

Delete Downloads on Disk

Delete Now

Do Not Delete

Activate Hex Trace

Coverage Estimator

Off

On

180

To

Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.

Notes:

Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.

Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not affected.

Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or memory.

Format the flash memory.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is being formatted.

Notes:

Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.

No cancels the format request.

Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in the printer.

The flash memory option card must not be read/write

‑ or write‑protected.

This menu item appears only when a non

‑defective flash memory card is installed.

Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs, and parked jobs.

Notes:

Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to return to the originating screen after the deletion.

Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for touch

‑screen printer models. When selected in non‑touch‑screen printer models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after the deletion.

Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.

Notes:

When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation, and control codes are not executed.

To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.

Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

XPS menu

Use

Print Error Pages

Off

On

PDF menu

Use

Scale to Fit

Yes

No

Annotations

Do Not Print

Print

PostScript menu

Use

Print PS Error

On

Off

Lock PS Startup Mode

On

Off

Font Priority

Resident

Flash/Disk

Image Smoothing

On

Off

To

Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

To

Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.

Note: No is the factory default setting.

Print annotations in a PDF.

Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

181

To

Print a page containing the PostScript error.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Enable users to disable the SysStart file.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Establish the font search order.

Notes:

Resident is the factory default setting.

This menu item appears only when a formatted, non

‑defective flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed.

Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read/write

‑, write‑, or password‑protected.

Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.

Enhance the contrast and sharpness of low

‑resolution images and smoothen their color transitions.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in resolution.

Understanding printer menus

PCL Emul menu

Use

Font Source

Resident

Disk

Download

Flash

All

Font Name

Courier 10

Symbol Set

10U PC

‑8

12U PC

‑850

PCL Emulation Settings

Point Size

1.00–1008.00

PCL Emulation Settings

Pitch

0.08–100.00

PCL Emulation Settings

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

182

To

Specify the set of fonts used in the Font Name menu.

Notes:

Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.

Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option. Make sure the flash option is properly formatted and is not read/write

‑, or password

‑protected.

Download shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.

All shows all fonts available to any option.

Identify a specific font and where it is stored.

Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting.

Specify the symbol set for each font name.

Notes:

10U PC

‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international factory default setting.

A symbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters, punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.

Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.

Notes:

12 is the factory default setting.

Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 0.014 of an inch. This can be increased or decreased in 0.25

‑point increments.

Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.

Notes:

10 is the factory default setting.

Pitch refers to the number of fixed

‑space characters per inch (cpi). This can be increased or decreased in 0.01

‑cpi increments.

For non

‑scalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed.

Specify the orientation of text and graphics on a page.

Notes:

Portrait is the factory default setting. It prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.

Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.

PCL Emulation Settings

A4 Width

198 mm

203 mm

PCL Emulation Settings

Auto CR after LF

On

Off

PCL Emulation Settings

Auto LF after CR

On

Off

Tray Renumber

Assign MP Feeder

Off

None

0–199

Assign Tray [x]

Off

None

0–199

Assign Manual Paper

Off

None

0–199

Assign Manual Envelope

Off

None

0–199

Understanding printer menus

Use

PCL Emulation Settings

Lines per Page

1–255

183

To

Specify the number of lines that print on each page.

Notes:

60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.

The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the

Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the paper size and orientation before setting Lines per Page.

Set the printer to print on A4

‑size paper.

Notes:

198 mm is the factory default setting.

The 203

‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10

‑pitch characters.

Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after a line feed (LF) control command.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a carriage return (CR) control command.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

None ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This selection appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter.

0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.

Understanding printer menus 184

Use

Tray Renumber

View Factory Defaults

MPF Default = 8

T1 Default = 1

T2 Default = 4

T3 Default = 5

T4 Default = 20

T5 Default = 21

Env Default = 6

MPaper Default = 2

MEnv Default = 3

Tray Renumber

Restore Defaults

Yes

No

HTML menu

Use

Font Name

Albertus MT

Antique Olive

Apple Chancery

Arial MT

Avant Garde

Bodoni

Bookman

Chicago

Clarendon

Cooper Black

Copperplate

Coronet

Courier

Eurostile

Garamond

Geneva

Gill Sans

Goudy

Helvetica

Hoefler Text

Intl CG Times

Intl Courier

Intl Univers

To

Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder.

Return all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.

Joanna MT

Letter Gothic

Lubalin Graph

Marigold

MonaLisa Recut

Monaco

New CenturySbk

New York

Optima

Oxford

Palatino

StempelGaramond

Taffy

Times

TimesNewRoman

Univers

Zapf Chancery

NewSansMTCS

NewSansMTCT

New SansMTJA

NewSansMTKO

To

Set the default font for HTML documents.

Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not specify a font.

Backgrounds

Do Not Print

Print

Image menu

Use

Auto Fit

On

Off

Invert

On

Off

Scaling

Anchor Top Left

Best Fit

Anchor Center

Fit Height/Width

Fit Height

Fit Width

Understanding printer menus

Use

Font Size

1–255 pt

Scale

1–400%

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

Margin Size

8–255 mm

To

Set the default font size for HTML documents.

Notes:

12 pt is the factory default setting.

Font size can be increased in 1

‑point increments.

Scale the default font for HTML documents.

Notes:

100% is the factory default setting.

Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.

Set the page orientation for HTML documents.

Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Set the page margin for HTML documents.

Notes:

19 mm is the factory default setting.

Margin size can be increased in 1

‑mm increments.

Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.

Note: Print is the factory default setting.

185

To

Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.

Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.

Invert bitonal monochrome images.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.

Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.

Notes:

Best Fit is the factory default setting.

When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.

Understanding printer menus 186

Use

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

Reverse Portrait

Reverse Landscape

To

Set the image orientation.

Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Help menu

The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the printer as PDF files. They contain information about using the printer and performing printing tasks.

English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available on the

Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.

Menu item

Print All Guides

Color Quality

Print Quality

Printing Guide

Media Guide

Print Defects Guide

Menu Map

Information Guide

Connection Guide

Moving Guide

Supplies Guide

Description

Prints all the guides

Provides information about adjusting and customizing color printing

Provides information about solving print quality issues

Provides information about loading paper and other speciality media

Provides a list of the paper sizes supported in trays, drawers, and feeders

Provides help in determining the printer part causing a repetitive defect

Provides a list of the printer control panel menus and settings

Provides help in locating additional information

Provides information about connecting the printer locally (USB) or to a network

Provides instructions for safely moving the printer

Provides part numbers for ordering supplies

Saving money and the environment 187

Saving money and the environment

Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:

The Notices chapter

The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment

The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.

Saving paper and toner

Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.

For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see "Using Eco-Mode".

Using recycled paper

As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for

use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled paper and other office papers” on page 127.

Conserving supplies

Use both sides of the paper

If your printer model supports duplex printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper by selecting 2

sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar.

Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper

You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple

‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N

‑Up) section of the Print dialog screen.

Check your first draft for accuracy

Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:

Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the document will look like before you print it.

Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.

Avoid paper jams

Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 201.

Saving money and the environment 188

Recycling

Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information, see:

The Notices chapter

The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment

The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

Recycling Lexmark products

To return Lexmark products for recycling:

1

Visit our Web site at www.lexmark.com/recycle.

2

Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.

3

Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in a Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.

Recycling Lexmark packaging

Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.

Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.

The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.

When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the box.

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling

The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.

To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:

1

Visit our Web site at www.lexmark.com/recycle.

2

From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region from the list.

3

Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Maintaining the printer 189

Maintaining the printer

Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum performance of your printer

Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to replace parts and supplies when directed, may cause damage to your printer or prevent the printer from performing optimally.

Ordering parts and supplies

To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.

Notes:

Each gauge displays the estimated life left for the supply or part.

All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter

‑ or A4‑size plain paper.

Ordering a toner cartridge

When a message on the printer display indicates which toner cartridge needs to be replaced, order a new toner cartridge immediately.

For information on replacing a toner cartridge, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19798 standard (with about 5% coverage per color). Extremely low print coverage (less than 1.25%) for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield for that color and may cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner.

Recommended toner cartridges and part numbers

Part name

Cyan Toner Cartridge

Cyan High Yield Toner Cartridge

*

Lexmark Return Program Cartridge

C746A1CG

C748H1CG

Magenta Toner Cartridge

Magenta High Yield Toner Cartridge

*

C746A1MG

C748H1MG

Yellow Toner Cartridge

Yellow High Yield Toner Cartridge

*

Black High Yield Toner Cartridge

C746A1YG

C748H1YG

C746H1KG

*

These toner cartridges are supported only in C748x printer models.

Regular cartridge

C746A2CG

C748H2CG

C746A2MG

C748H2MG

C746A2YG

C748H2YG

C746H2KG

Ordering a photoconductor

A message will appear on the printer display when a photoconductor needs to be replaced.

For information on replacing a photoconductor, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Maintaining the printer 190

Recommended part numbers

Part name

Photoconductor

Photoconductor, Multi

‑Pack

Part number

C734X20G

C734X24G

Notes:

All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time.

Reset the maintenance counter back to zero after installing the four new photoconductors.

Ordering a fuser or a transfer module

A message on the printer display appears when the fuser or transfer module needs to be replaced.

For information on replacing the fuser or transfer module, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Recommended part numbers

Part name

Fuser

Transfer module

Part number

40X8112 (100 V)

40X8110 (115 V)

40X8111 (230 V)

40X8307

Ordering a waste toner bottle

A message on the printer display appears when the waste toner bottle needs to be replaced.

For information on replacing the waste toner bottle, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Note: Waste toner bottle reuse is not recommended.

Recommended part number

Part name

Waste toner bottle

Part number

C734X77G

Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies

Lexmark printers, parts, and supplies are designed to perform together for superior print quality. We recommend that you use only genuine Lexmark parts and supplies to help extend the life of your product.

Lexmark's warranty does not cover damage caused by non-Lexmark parts and supplies.

Maintaining the printer 191

Storing supplies

Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them.

Do not expose supplies to:

Direct sunlight

Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)

High humidity above 80%

Salty air

Corrosive gases

Heavy dust

Replacing parts and supplies

Replacing a toner cartridge

1

Open the front door.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the front door open for more than 10 minutes.

2

Pull the green tabs up and out of the specified cartridge to remove it from the printer.

Maintaining the printer 192

3

Unpack the replacement toner cartridge, and then shake it front

‑to‑back and side‑to‑side to redistribute the toner.

4

Remove the red packing strip from the new cartridge.

5

Insert the new cartridge into the printer.

Note: Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.

6

Close the front door.

Note: When print becomes faded, immediately order a new cartridge. A message on the printer display specifies what color cartridge is low in toner. You can try to extend the life of the cartridges by pulling them out of the printer and shaking them to redistribute the toner.

Maintaining the printer

Replacing the waste toner bottle

1

Locate the waste toner bottle release button on the left side of the printer.

2

Press the release button to the left, and then pull the waste toner bottle out to remove it from the printer.

193

1

2

3

Unpack the replacement waste toner bottle.

1

2

4

Peel the seal from the side of the full waste toner bottle, and then place it over the hole to seal off the waste toner bottle.

1

5

Place the sealed waste toner bottle in the recycling bag.

2

Maintaining the printer

6

Place the bag into the shipping box used for the replacement part.

1

7

Peel the recycling label off and place it on the shipping box.

1

2

2

8

Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer.

194

1

2

Replacing a photoconductor

Notes:

Replace all four photoconductors at the same time for optimum print quality.

Print quality is affected when the photoconductor is replaced without resetting the supply counter.

1

Open the front door.

Maintaining the printer 195

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the door open for more than 10 minutes.

2

Pull the specified photoconductor up, and then slide it to the right to remove it from the printer.

2

1

3

Unpack the replacement photoconductor.

1 2 3

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny area on the photoconductor drum. Touching it could damage the photoconductor.

Maintaining the printer

4

Align and insert the left end of the photoconductor, and then press the right end into place.

1

2

5

Remove the red packing strip from the top of the photoconductor.

196

6

Close the front door.

Maintaining the printer 197

Resetting the maintenance counter

Reset the maintenance counter after installing a new photoconductor.

When a “replace” or “low” message appears

Follow this procedure when a photoconductor is replaced and 84 Replace [color] photoconductor, 84

[Color] photoconductor nearly low

, or 84 [Color] photoconductor low appears:

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Status/Supplies > > Supply Replaced >

or

> Status/Supplies > Supply Replaced

2

When Replaced [color] photoconductor appears, select Yes. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

Notes:

to confirm.

Make sure to replace all four photoconductors at the same time.

When Ready appears, the counter is reset.

When a “replace” or “low” message does not appear

Follow this procedure when a photoconductor is replaced and a “replace” or “low” message does not appear:

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > > Supplies Menu > > Replace Supply >

or

> Supplies Menu > Replace Supply

2

Select the button that indicates the supply item you replaced.

All

Cyan Photoconductor

Magenta Photoconductor

Yellow Photoconductor

Black Photoconductor

3

When [Color] photoconductor replaced appears, select Yes. For non

‑touch screen printer models, press to confirm.

4

Press to return to the home screen.

Maintaining the printer 198

Cleaning the the printer parts

Cleaning the interior of the printer

Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.

Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty.

1

Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the interior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.

2

Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.

3

Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around and from inside the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.

4

Use a dry cloth to wipe away loose toner particles.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor unit or imaging unit, do not the leave the door open for more than 10 minutes.

Cleaning the exterior of the printer

1

Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.

2

Remove all paper from the printer.

3

Dampen a clean, lint

‑free cloth with water.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of the printer.

4

Wipe only the outside of the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.

5

Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before beginning a new print job.

Cleaning the printhead lenses

Clean the printhead lenses when you encounter print quality problems.

1

Open the front door.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door open for more than 10 minutes.

Maintaining the printer 199

2

Remove all four toner cartridges. Do not remove the photoconductor units for this procedure.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny area on the photoconductor drum. Doing so can damage the photoconductor.

3

Locate the four printhead lenses.

4

Clean the lenses using compressed air.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the printhead lenses. Doing so may cause damage.

5

Reinstall the four toner cartridges.

Maintaining the printer

6

Close the front door.

200

Moving the printer

Before moving the printer

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:

Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.

Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time.

Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.

Moving the printer to another location

The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:

Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Any cart used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.

Keep the printer in an upright position.

Avoid severe jarring movements.

Shipping the printer

When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.

Clearing jams 201

Clearing jams

Carefully select paper and specialty media and load it properly to avoid most jams. If jams do occur, follow the steps outlined in this section.

Note: Jam recovery is set to Auto by default. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks.

Avoiding jams

Load paper properly

Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.

Correct paper loading Incorrect paper loading

Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.

Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.

Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator.

Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes.

Push the tray in firmly after loading paper.

Use recommended paper

Use only recommended paper or specialty media.

Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.

Flex and straighten paper before loading it.

Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.

Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.

Clearing jams 202

Make sure all paper sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.

Store paper per manufacturer recommendations.

Understanding jam numbers and locations

When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears on the printer display. Open doors and covers, and remove trays to access jam locations. To resolve any paper jam message, you must clear all jammed papers from all possible locations.

Area name

Inside the printer

Inside the printer

Inside the printer

Standard output bin

Tray [x]

Multipurpose feeder

Jam numbers

200–201

202–203

230

202–203

24x

250

What to do

Open the front door, and then remove the jammed paper from behind the toner cartridge area.

Open the front door, and then remove the jammed paper from under the photoconductor units.

Open the front door, and then remove the jammed paper from under the fuser.

Open the front door, and then remove the jammed paper from the fuser area.

Open the top access cover, and then remove the jammed paper.

Open the front door, and then remove the jammed paper located between the front door and Tray 1.

Remove all paper from the standard output bin, and then remove the jammed paper.

Open each tray, and then remove any jams.

Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and then remove the jammed paper.

Clearing jams 203

200–201 paper jams

Paper jam in the toner cartridge area

1

Open the front door.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door open for more than 10 minutes.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

2

Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it up and out to remove it from behind the toner cartridge area.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3

Close the front door.

4

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .

Clearing jams 204

Paper jam under the photoconductor units

1

Open the front door.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door open for more than 10 minutes.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

2

If lodged under the photoconductor units, then firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out .

3

If the jammed paper is lodged too tightly under the photoconductor units, then remove the photoconductor units and place them on a flat surface.

Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.

1

2

4

Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, then gently pull it out, and then reinstall each photoconductor unit.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

5

Close the front door.

6

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .

Clearing jams

Paper jam in the fuser area

1

Open the front door.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door open for more than 10 minutes.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

2

Open the printer top access cover.

3

Determine where the jammed paper is located, and then remove it:

a

If the paper is visible under the fuser, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

205

b

If the paper is visible at the top paper guide in the fuser assembly, then firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

c

If paper is not visible, then remove the fuser unit:

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the roller at the center of the fuser unit. Doing so may damage the fuser.

1

Turn the screws on the fuser counterclockwise to loosen them.

Clearing jams

2

Using the handholds on each side, lift and pull the fuser out of the printer.

d

Place the fuser on a flat surface with the blue thumb screws facing you.

e

Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob clockwise to unlock the top paper guide.

1

2 f

Press the green arrow tab to the left, and then lift the top paper guide.

1

2 g

Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

206

Clearing jams

h

Close the top paper guide. Make sure both sides of the paper guide are firmly seated.

i

Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob counterclockwise to firmly secure the top paper guide.

1

2 j

Reinstall the fuser unit:

1

Align the fuser unit using the handholds on each side, and then insert it back into the printer.

2

Turn the screws clockwise to fasten the fuser securely.

207

Clearing jams 208

4

Close the printer top access cover, and then close the front door.

5

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .

202–203 paper jams

If the jammed paper is visible in the standard exit bin, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Paper jam in the fuser area

1

Open the front door.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the front doors open for more than 10 minutes.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

2

Open the printer top access cover.

3

Determine where the jammed paper is located, and then remove it:

a

If the jammed paper is visible under the fuser, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

b

If the jammed paper is visible at the top paper guide in the fuser assembly, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams 209

c

If the jammed paper is not visible, then remove the fuser unit:

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the roller at the center of the fuser unit. Doing so may damage the fuser.

1

Turn the screws on the fuser counterclockwise to loosen them.

2

Using the handholds on each side, lift and pull the fuser out of the printer.

d

Place the fuser on a flat surface with the blue thumb screws facing you.

Clearing jams

e

Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob clockwise to unlock the top paper guide.

1

2 f

Press the green arrow tab to the left, and then lift the top paper guide.

1

2

210

g

Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

h

Close the top paper guide. Make sure both sides of the paper guide are firmly seated.

Clearing jams

i

Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob counterclockwise to firmly secure the top paper guide.

211

1

2 j

Reinstall the fuser unit:

1

Align the fuser unit using the handholds on each side, and then insert it back into the printer.

2

Turn the screws clockwise to fasten the fuser securely.

4

Close the printer top access cover, and then close the front door.

5

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .

Paper jam inside the top access cover

1

Open the front door.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the front doors open for more than 10 minutes.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

2

Open the printer top access cover.

3

Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4

Close the printer top access cover, and then close the front door.

5

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .

Clearing jams

24x paper jam

Paper jam in Tray 1

1

Open Tray 1.

2

Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3

Close Tray 1.

4

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .

212

Clearing jams

Paper jam in one of the optional trays

1

Open the specified tray.

2

Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

213

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3

Close the tray.

4

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .

250 paper jam

1

Press the paper release lever, and then remove any jammed pages from the multipurpose feeder.

1

2

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

2

Load new paper into the multipurpose feeder.

3

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .

Troubleshooting 214

Troubleshooting

Solving basic printer problems

If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:

The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.

The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.

The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.

Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.

The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.

The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network device.

All options are properly installed.

The printer driver settings are correct.

Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on. This often fixes the problem.

Understanding printer messages

An error has occurred with the USB drive. Please remove and reinsert drive.

Try one or more of the following:

Remove and reinsert the flash drive.

If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacement.

Change [paper source] to [custom type name]

Try one or more of the following

Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Cancel the print job.

Troubleshooting 215

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following

Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [custom string]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper size]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Cancel the print job.

Troubleshooting 216

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Cancel the print job.

Close front door

Close the front door of the printer.

Disk corrupted

The printer attempted to recover data on a corrupted hard disk. The hard disk must be reformatted.

Select Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.

Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk.

Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.

Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.

Install a hard disk with higher capacity.

Disk problem

The printer hard disk must be reformatted.

Select Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.

Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.

Troubleshooting 217

Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.

An unsupported flash drive is inserted. Remove the flash drive, and then install a supported one.

Insert Tray [x]

Insert the specified tray into the printer.

Install Tray [x]

Try one or more of the following:

Install the specified tray:

1

Turn the printer off.

2

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

3

Install the specified tray.

4

Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

5

Turn the printer back on.

Cancel the print job.

Load [paper source] with [custom type name]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the tray or feeder with the correct paper size and type.

To use the paper tray with the correct paper size or type, select Paper loaded, continue on the printer control panel.

For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.

Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [custom string]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct paper size and type.

To use the paper tray with the correct paper size or type, select Paper loaded, continue on the printer control panel.

For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.

Cancel the current job.

Troubleshooting 218

Load [paper source] with [paper size]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct paper size.

To use the paper tray or feeder with the correct paper size, select Paper loaded, continue on the printer control panel. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper size, then it prints from the default paper source.

Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct paper size and type.

To use the paper tray or feeder with the correct paper size and type, select Paper loaded, continue on the printer control panel. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper size and type, then it prints from the default paper source.

Cancel the current job.

Load manual feeder with [custom type name]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue printing.

Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or the request, and then prints from an automatically selected tray.

is selected, then the printer manually overrides

Cancel the current job.

Load manual feeder with [custom string]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue printing.

Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or is selected, then the printer automatically overrides the request, and then prints from an automatically selected tray.

Cancel the current job.

Troubleshooting 219

Load manual feeder with [paper size]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the feeder with the correct paper size.

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue printing.

Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or the request, and then prints from an automatically selected tray.

is selected, then the printer manually overrides

Cancel the current job.

Load manual feeder with [paper type] [paper size]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue printing.

Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or the request, and then prints from an automatically selected tray.

is selected, then the printer manually overrides

Cancel the current job.

Paper changes needed

Try one or more of the following:

Select Use current supplies to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Cancel the current print job.

Remove packaging material, [area name]

1

Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.

2

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Remove paper from standard output bin

1

Remove paper stack from the standard output bin.

2

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Troubleshooting 220

Restore held jobs?

Try one or more of the following:

Select Restore on the printer control panel to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Select Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Some held jobs were not restored

Select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.

Supply needed to complete job

A supply needed to complete the job is missing. Cancel the current job.

Tray [x] paper size unsupported

The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported. Replace it with a supported paper size.

Unsupported disk

1

Remove the unsupported disk, and then install a supported one.

2

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch screen printer models, press

to confirm.

31.xx Missing or defective [color] cartridge

The specified toner cartridge is either missing or not functioning properly.

Remove the specified toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.

Remove the specified toner cartridge, and then install a new one.

32.xx [Color] cartridge part number unsupported by device

Remove the specified toner cartridge, and then install a supported one.

Troubleshooting 221

34 Incorrect paper size, open [paper source]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the correct paper size in the tray.

Select Continue to clear the message and print the job using a different paper tray. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Check tray length and width guides and make sure paper is properly loaded in the tray.

For Windows users, check the Print Properties settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper size and type.

For Macintosh users, check the Print dialog settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper size and type.

Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.

Cancel the current print job.

35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit the menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Ready appears, enable Resource Save.

Install additional memory.

36 Printer service required

Select Continue to clear the message or contact customer support. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Delete fonts, macros, and other data in the printer memory.

Install additional printer memory.

Troubleshooting 222

37 Insufficient memory to collate job

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

Cancel the current print job.

to confirm.

37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted

The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored

The printer is unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs in the printer hard disk.

Select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

38 Memory full

Try one or more of the following:

Select Cancel job to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Install additional printer memory.

39 Complex page, some data may not have printed

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Cancel the current print job.

Install additional printer memory.

51 Defective flash detected

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Cancel the current print job.

Troubleshooting 223

52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.

Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.

Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.

53 Unformatted flash detected

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Format the flash memory. If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and may need to be replaced.

54 Network [x] software error

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer. For more information, contact customer support.

54 Serial option [x] error

Try one or more of the following:

Check that the serial cable is connected properly and is the correct one for the serial port.

Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer and on the computer.

Select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Turn the printer power off, and then turn it back on.

54 Standard network software error

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Turn the printer off, and then turn it back on.

Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.

Troubleshooting 224

55 Unsupported option in slot [x]

1

Turn the printer off.

2

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

3

Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board, and then replace it with a supported card.

4

Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

5

Turn the printer back on.

56 Parallel port [x] disabled

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.

Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.

56 Serial port [x] disabled

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

The printer discards any data received through the serial port.

Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.

56 Standard USB port disabled

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

The printer discards any data received through the USB port.

Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.

56 USB port [x] disabled

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

The printer discards any data received through the USB port.

Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.

Troubleshooting

57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored

Something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs. Possible changes include:

The printer firmware has been updated.

Paper input options needed for the print job were removed.

The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the USB port.

The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.

Select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

58 Input config error

1

Turn the printer off.

2

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

3

Check if all tray configurations are correct. Remove unnecessary trays if needed.

4

Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

5

Turn the printer back on.

58 Too many disks installed

1

Turn the printer off.

2

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

3

Remove the excess disks.

4

Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

5

Turn the printer back on.

58 Too many flash options installed

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Remove extra flash options:

1

Turn off the printer.

2

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

3

Remove the excess flash memory.

4

Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

5

Turn the printer back on.

225

Troubleshooting 226

58 Too many trays attached

1

Turn the printer off.

2

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked. Remove stacked trays one at a time from the top down.

3

Remove the additional trays.

4

Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.

5

Turn the printer back on.

59 Incompatible tray [x]

Only options designed specifically for this printer are supported.

Try one or more of the following:

Remove the specified tray.

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

61 Remove defective disk

Try one or more of the following:

Remove the defective printer hard disk.

Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.

62 Disk full

Try one or more of the following:

Select Continue to clear the message and continue processing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.

Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.

80.xx Fuser near life warning

1

Order a replacement fuser immediately. When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

2

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Troubleshooting 227

80.xx Fuser life warning

Order a replacement fuser immediately. When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printers, press

to confirm.

80.xx Replace fuser

1

Replace the fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

2

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

80.xx Fuser missing

Reinsert the fuser into the printer.

For instructions on installing the fuser, select More Information on the printer control panel.

82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full

Make sure a replacement waste toner bottle has been ordered.

1

Replace the waste toner bottle.

For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle, select More Information on the printer control panel.

2

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

82.xx Replace waste toner bottle

1

Replace the waste toner bottle.

For instructions on replacing the waste toner bottle, select More Information on the printer control panel.

2

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

82.xx Waste toner bottle missing

1

Reinsert the waste toner bottle into the printer.

For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle, select More Information on the printer control panel.

2

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.

Troubleshooting 228

83.xx Transfer module life warning

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Order a replacement transfer module immediately. When print quality is reduced, install the new transfer module, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

83.xx Transfer module missing

Reinsert the transfer module into the printer.

For instructions on installing the transfer module, select More Information on the printer control panel.

83.xx Replace transfer module

1

Replace the transfer module

For instructions on installing the transfer module, select More Information on the printer control panel.

2

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

83.xx Transfer module near life warning

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Order a replacement transfer module immediately. When print quality is reduced, install the new transfer module, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

84.xx [Color] photoconductor nearly low

1

Order a replacement photoconductor.

2

When print quality is reduced, install the new photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement supply.

Notes:

All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time.

Make sure to reset the maintenance counter after replacing the photoconductors for optimum print quality.

3

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

84.xx [Color] photoconductor low

1

Order a replacement photoconductor immediately.

2

When print quality is reduced, install the new photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement supply.

Troubleshooting 229

Notes:

All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time.

Make sure to reset the maintenance counter after replacing the photoconductors for optimum print quality.

3

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

84.xx Replace [color] photoconductor

1

Replace the photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement supply.

Notes:

All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time.

Make sure to reset the maintenance counter after replacing the photoconductors for optimum print quality.

2

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

84.xx [Color] photoconductor missing

Install the specified color photoconductor.

For instructions on installing the photoconductor, select More Information on the printer control panel.

88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low

Order a replacement for the specified toner cartridge.

88.xx [color] cartridge low

1

Remove the specified cartridge.

Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.

2

Firmly shake the cartridge side

‑to‑side and front‑to‑back several times to redistribute the toner.

3

Reinsert the cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

Notes:

Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded. When the print remains faded, replace the cartridge.

Have a new cartridge available when the current one no longer prints satisfactorily.

Troubleshooting 230

88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low

The specified toner cartridge is critically low.

1

For instructions on replacing a toner cartridge, select More Information on the printer control panel.

2

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

88.xx [Color] cartridge very low

The specified print or toner cartridge is very low.

1

For instructions on replacing a cartridge, select More Information on the printer control panel.

2

Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Solving printing problems

Confidential and other held jobs do not print

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

P

ARTIAL JOB

,

NO JOB

,

OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS

The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.

Delete the print job, and then print it again.

For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.

If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one.

For Windows users, open Print Properties. From the Print and Hold dialog, select the "Keep duplicate documents" check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number.

For Macintosh users, save each print job, naming each job differently, and then send the individual jobs to the printer.

M

AKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY

Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.

Error message about reading USB drive appears

Make sure the flash drive is supported.

Troubleshooting 231

Incorrect characters print

Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode. If Ready Hex appears on the display, you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.

Make sure the SmartSwitch settings are set to On in the Network and USB menus.

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper

C

HECK THE PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS

Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1

From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the paper type and paper size settings.

2

Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:

For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.

For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.

Large jobs do not collate

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

M

AKE SURE

C

OLLATE IS SET TO

O

N

From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.

Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.

R

EDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB

Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.

M

AKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY

Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.

Multiple

language PDF files do not print

The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts.

1

Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.

2

Click the printer icon > Advanced > Print as image > OK > OK.

Troubleshooting 232

Print jobs do not print

Try one or more of the following:

M

AKE SURE THERE IS NO PROBLEM WITH YOUR PRINTER

From the printer control panel, check the status. If necessary, follow the recovery instructions.

M

AKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT

Make sure Ready appears on the display before sending a print job.

C

HECK IF A SUPPLY IS MISSING OR NEEDS REPLACEMENT

Remove and then reinstall or replace the supply.

C

HECK IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL

Remove the paper stack from the standard exit bin.

C

HECK IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY

Load paper in the tray.

M

AKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED

Verify that you are using the correct printer software.

If the printer is connected to your computer through a USB port, then make sure you are running a supported operating system and using a compatible printer software.

M

AKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS WORKING PROPERLY

Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.

Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected, then check the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support person to make sure the network is functioning correctly.

The printer software is available on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

M

AKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED

USB,

SERIAL

,

OR

E

THERNET CABLE

For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

M

AKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED

Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.

For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.

Troubleshooting 233

Print job takes longer than expected

Try one or more of the following:

R

EDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB

Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print job.

T

URN OFF THE

P

AGE

P

ROTECT SETTING

1

Depending on your printer model, press or touch .

2

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off

3

Press or touch .

C

HANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS

When using Eco

‑Mode or Quiet Mode settings, you may notice a reduction in performance.

Printing slows down

Try one or more of the following:

M

AKE SURE TO USE PAPER NOT NARROW ENOUGH TO INVOKE THE SLOWDOWN MODE

Place larger paper such as Letter and A4 in the tray, and then print the same file.

Note: The slowdown mode functions as designed. This is to protect the fuser from becoming damaged by large temperature differentials across its length.

C

ONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT

If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.

Printer display is blank

The printer self

‑test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

If Performing Self Test and Ready do not appear, then turn the printer off, and then contact customer support.

Troubleshooting

Tray linking does not work

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

L

OAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER

Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.

Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.

U

SE THE SAME

P

APER

S

IZE AND

P

APER

T

YPE SETTINGS

Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.

If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.

Note: The standard 550-sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper Size/Type menu.

Unexpected page breaks

I

NCREASE THE

P

RINT

T

IMEOUT VALUE

1

Depending on your printer model, press or touch .

2

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Print Timeout

3

Increase the Print Timeout value, and then press or touch to confirm.

Solving home screen applications problems

Note: This troubleshooting step applies only to touch-screen printer models.

An application error has occurred

C

HECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS

1

Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:

View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the

Networks/Ports menu.

Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.

2

Click Settings or Configuration.

3

Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > System tab > Log.

4

From the Filter menu, select an application status.

5

From the Application menu, select an application, and then click Submit.

234

Troubleshooting

C

ONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT

If you still cannot isolate the problem, then contact customer support.

Solving option problems

2,000-sheet drawer problems

C

HECK THE DRAWER CONNECTION

Make sure the 2,000

‑sheet drawer is properly connected to the printer.

L

OAD PAPER

If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.

C

LEAR ANY JAMS

Open the tray or feeder, and then remove any jammed paper.

A

VOID PAPER JAMS

Flex the paper.

Make sure the drawer is properly installed.

Make sure paper is loaded correctly.

Make sure the paper stack you load does not exceed the maximum fill line indicated in the tray.

Make sure the paper or specialty media meets specifications and is not damaged.

Make sure the guides are positioned correctly for the paper size loaded.

Cannot detect flash memory card

Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.

Cannot detect printer hard disk

Make sure the printer hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.

Internal print server does not operate correctly

Try one or more of the following:

C

HECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS

Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board.

Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.

235

Troubleshooting 236

M

AKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY

For more information on installing the network printing software, do the following:

1

Open the Software and Documentation CD.

2

Click Additional.

3

Under Publications on this CD, select Networking Guide.

Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly

Try one or more of the following:

C

HECK THE

I

NTERNAL

S

OLUTIONS

P

ORT

(ISP)

CONNECTIONS

Make sure the ISP is securely connected to the printer system board.

C

HECK THE CABLE

Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected to the Internal Solutions (ISP) port.

M

AKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY

For information on installing the network printing software, see the Networking Guide on the Software and

Documentation CD.

Memory card

Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.

Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed

Try one or more of the following:

R

ESET THE PRINTER

Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.

C

HECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER

1

Turn the printer off using the power switch.

2

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and then from the printer.

3

Check the connection between the option and the printer.

M

AKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY

Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option, or go to www.lexmark.com to view the option instruction sheet.

Troubleshooting 237

M

AKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED

From the computer you are printing from, select the option.

For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 34.

Paper tray problems

Try one or more of the following:

M

AKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY

1

Open the paper tray.

2

Check for paper jams or misfeeds.

3

Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.

4

Make sure the paper tray closes properly.

R

ESET THE PRINTER

Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.

M

AKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY

If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray, then it may not be properly installed. Reinstall the paper tray. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the paper tray, or go to http://support.lexmark.com to view the paper tray instruction sheet.

USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly

C

HECK THE

USB/

PARALLEL INTERFACE CARD CONNECTION

Make sure the USB/parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board.

C

HECK THE CABLE

Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.

Solving paper feed problems

Paper frequently jams

Try one or more of the following:

C

HECK THE PAPER

Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty media guidelines.

Troubleshooting 238

M

AKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY

Make sure the paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located in the tray or feeder.

M

AKE SURE THE ENTIRE PAPER STACK IS SITTING FLAT IN THE TRAY

Before loading the paper, do the following:

Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper.

Straighten the edges on a level surface.

C

HECK THE PAPER GUIDES

Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

L

OAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE

The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared

1

Clear any jammed paper from all specified locations.

2

From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Jammed pages are not reprinted

T

URN ON

J

AM

R

ECOVERY

1

Depending on your printer model, press or touch .

2

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery

3

Select the arrows next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears.

4

Press or touch to confirm.

Troubleshooting 239

Solving print quality problems

If the solutions here do not correct the problem, contact customer support. You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement.

Characters have jagged or uneven edges

If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the software program.

Clipped images

Try one or more of the following:

C

HECK THE GUIDES

Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

C

HECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING

Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1

From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.

2

Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:

For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.

For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.

Gray background on prints

ABCDE

ABCDE

ABCDE

Try one or more of the following:

Troubleshooting

C

HECK THE BACKGROUND DARKNESS OR REMOVAL SETTING

Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting.

Increase the background removal setting.

M

AKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN OR DEFECTIVE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE

Replace the worn or defective cartridge.

Incorrect margins

A B C D

A B C D

A B C D

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

C

HECK THE PAPER GUIDES

Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

C

HECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING

Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1

From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.

2

Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:

For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.

For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.

Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints

ABCDE

ABCDE

A B C D E

A B C D E

A B C D E

Try one or more of the following:

240

Troubleshooting

M

AKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE

Replace the worn or defective cartridge.

For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

M

AKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE

Replace the defective transfer module.

For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

Paper curl

Try one or more of the following:

C

HECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS

Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

1

From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.

2

Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:

For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.

For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.

L

OAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE

Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

Print irregularities

241

Try one or more of the following:

L

OAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE

The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

Troubleshooting

C

HECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS

Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

1

From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.

2

Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:

For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.

For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.

A

VOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES

M

AKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE

Replace the worn or defective cartridge.

M

AKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE

Replace the defective transfer module.

For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

M

AKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE

Replace the defective fuser.

For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

Print is too dark

242

Try one or more of the following:

C

HECK THE DARKNESS

,

BRIGHTNESS

,

AND CONTRAST SETTINGS

From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select a lower value for these settings.

For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.

For Macintosh users:

1

Choose File > Print.

2

From the print options pop-up menu, choose Printer Features.

3

Choose a lower value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.

Troubleshooting 243

L

OAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE

The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

A

VOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES

C

HECK THE

P

APER

T

YPE SETTING

Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

From the Paper menu on printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting.

For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.

For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.

Print is too light

Try one or more of the following:

C

HECK THE DARKNESS

,

BRIGHTNESS

,

AND CONTRAST SETTINGS

The Toner Darkness setting may be too light, the Brightness setting may be too light, or the Contrast setting may be too low.

Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.

For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties

For Macintosh users:

1

Choose File > Print.

2

From the print options pop-up menu, choose Printer Features.

3

Choose a higher value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.

L

OAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE

The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

A

VOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES

Troubleshooting 244

C

HECK THE

P

APER

T

YPE SETTING

Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.

For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.

For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.

M

AKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER

1

Remove the cartridge.

Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.

2

Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.

3

Reinsert the cartridge.

Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing.

C

ONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT

If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced.

Printer is printing blank pages

Try one or more of the following:

M

AKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE

Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the cartridge.

M

AKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER

1

Remove the cartridge.

Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.

2

Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.

3

Reinsert the cartridge.

Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing.

Troubleshooting 245

)

)

)

C

ONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT

If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced.

Repeating defects appear on prints

Try one or more of the following:

R

EPLACE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE

Replace the cartridge of the color with the repeating defect, if the defects occur in the following instances:

Every 33 mm (1.30 in.) of the page

Every 35.3 mm (1.39 in.) of the page

R

EPLACE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR

Replace the photoconductor of the color with the repeating defect, if the defects occur in the following instances:

Every 28.3 mm (1.11 in.) of the page

Every 72.4 mm (2.85 in.) of the page

R

EPLACE THE FUSER

Replace the fuser if print defects occur in the following instances:

Every 47.4 mm (1.87 in.) of the page

Every 94.8 mm (3.73 in.) of the page

Every 113 mm (4.45 in.) of the page

Shadow images appear on prints

Troubleshooting 246

C

HECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS

Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray:

1

From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.

2

Before sending the job to print, specify the correct paper type setting:

For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.

For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.

M

AKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS NOT DEFECTIVE

Replace the defective photoconductor.

M

AKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER

1

Remove the cartridge.

Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.

2

Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.

3

Reinsert the cartridge.

Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge.

C

ONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT

If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced.

Skewed print

C

HECK THE PAPER GUIDES

Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

C

HECK THE PAPER

Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.

Solid color or black pages appear on prints

Troubleshooting 247

M

AKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS NOT DEFECTIVE AND IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY

Remove and then reinstall the photoconductor. If the problem continues, then the photoconductor may need to be replaced.

M

AKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY

,

ARE NOT DEFECTIVE

,

AND NOT

LOW ON TONER

Remove the cartridges, shake each cartridge from side to side to redistribute the toner, and then reinstall them.

Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.

Reinsert the cartridges.

Note: If the quality does not improve, then replace the cartridges.

C

ONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT

If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced.

Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints

ABCDE

ABCDE

ABCDE

Try one or more of the following:

S

ELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Paper Menu > Default Source > select a tray or feeder > Submit

For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.

For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop

‑up menus.

M

AKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN

,

DEFECTIVE

,

OR EMPTY PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE

Replace the worn, defective, or empty cartridge.

Troubleshooting

Streaked vertical lines appear on prints

ABCDE

ABCDE

ABCDE

Try one or more of the following:

S

ELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Paper Menu > Default Source > select a tray or feeder > Submit

For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.

For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop

‑up menus.

M

AKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN

,

DEFECTIVE

,

OR EMPTY PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE

Replace the worn, defective, or empty cartridge.

M

AKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE

Replace the worn or defective transfer module.

Toner fog or background shading appears on the page

Try one or more of the following:

M

AKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY OR IS NOT DEFECTIVE

Reinstall or replace the defective print or toner cartridge.

M

AKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE

Replace the worn or defective transfer module.

M

AKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE

Replace the worn or defective photoconductor.

M

AKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE

Replace the worn or defective fuser.

M

AKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS BEEN RECALIBRATED RECENTLY

Select Color Adjust in the Quality menu.

248

Troubleshooting

M

AKE SURE THE APPLICATION HAS NOT SPECIFIED AN OFF

WHITE BACKGROUND

Check the application settings.

M

AKE SURE NO TONER IS IN THE PAPER PATH

Contact customer support.

Toner rubs off

249

Try one or more of the following:

C

HECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS

Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

1

From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings. Change the Paper

Weight setting from Normal to Heavy.

2

Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:

For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.

For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.

C

HECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING

From the printer control panel Paper menu, make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder. If necessary, change the Paper Texture setting from Normal to Rough.

M

AKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE

Replace the worn or defective fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

Troubleshooting

Toner specks

Try one or more of the following:

M

AKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN OR DEFECTIVE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE

Replace the worn or defective cartridge.

M

AKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH

C

ONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT

If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced.

Transparency print quality is poor

Try one or more of the following:

C

HECK THE TRANSPARENCIES

Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications.

C

HECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING

Make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency:

1

From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.

2

Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:

For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.

For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.

250

Troubleshooting

Uneven print density

251

M

AKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE OR WORN PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE

Replace the worn or defective cartridge.

Solving color quality problems

FAQ about color printing

What is RGB color?

Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors create colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue needed to produce a certain color.

What is CMYK color?

Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses, inkjet printers, and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.

How is color specified in a document to be printed?

Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they allow users to modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the software program Help topics.

How does the printer know what color to print?

When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the desired color. The object information determines the application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.

Why doesn't the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen?

The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, there are many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions. For recommendations on how the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color

‑matching problems, see the question, “How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?”

Troubleshooting 252

The printed page appears tinted. Can I adjust the color?

Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted (for example, everything printed seems to be too red). This can be caused by environmental conditions, paper type, lighting conditions, or user preference. In these instances, adjust the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color. Color Balance provides the user with the ability to make subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane. Selecting positive or negative values for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (from the Color Balance menu) will slightly increase or decrease the amount of toner used for the chosen color. For example, if a printed page has a red tint, then decreasing both magenta and yellow could potentially improve the color balance.

My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected. Is there anything I can do to improve the color?

This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended. If a reflective projector must be used, then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1, 2, or 3 will lighten the transparency. Make sure to print on the recommended type of color transparencies.

What is manual color correction?

When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user

‑selected color conversion tables to process objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user

‑defined color conversion will be implemented.

Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).

Notes:

Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating system controls the adjustment of colors.

The color conversion tables—applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto—generate preferred colors for the majority of documents.

To manually apply a different color conversion table:

1

From the Quality menu, select Color Correction, and then select Manual.

2

From the Quality menu, select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the affected object type.

Manual Color menu

Object type

RGB Image

RGB Text

RGB Graphics

Color conversion tables

Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be applied to all incoming color formats.

sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor. Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs.

Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor. Uses only black toner to create all levels of neutral gray.

sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB

Display color correction. Black usage is optimized for printing business graphics.

Off—No color correction is implemented.

Troubleshooting 253

Object type

CMYK Image

CMYK Text

CMYK Graphics

Color conversion tables

US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP

(Specifications for Web Offset Publishing) color output.

Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color output.

Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color correction setting.

Off—No color correction is implemented.

How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?

From the printer Quality menu, nine types of Color Samples sets are available. These are also available from the Color

Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a multiple

‑page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box, depending on the table selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table.

By examining Color Samples sets, a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color. The color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program. For more information, see the software program Help topics. Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the selected color conversion table for the particular object.

Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color

‑matching problem depends on the Color Correction setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual), the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations). When the printer Color

Correction setting is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information; and no color conversion is implemented.

Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. The resulting printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.

What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them?

Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer. A detailed

Color Samples set contains a range of shades (displayed as colored boxes) that are similar to a user

‑defined RGB or

CMYK value. The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment box.

To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server:

1

Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:

View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the

Networks/Ports menu.

Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.

2

Click Configuration > Color Samples > Detailed Options.

3

Select a color conversion table.

4

Enter the RGB or CMYK color number.

Troubleshooting 254

5

Enter an increment value from 1–255.

Note: The closer the value is to 1, the narrower the color sample range will appear.

6

Click Print.

Embedded Web Server does not open

Try one or more of the following:

C

HECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION

Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.

C

HECK THE ADDRESS ENTERED IN THE

W

EB BROWSER

Depending on the network settings, you may need to type “https://” instead of “http://” before the printer

IP address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, contact your system support person.

Make sure printer IP address is correct.

T

EMPORARILY DISABLE

W

EB PROXY SERVERS

Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server. For more information, contact your system support person.

Contacting customer support

When you call customer support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.

You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.

In the U.S. or Canada, call 1

‑800‑539‑6275. For other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at

http://support.lexmark.com.

Notices 255

Notices

Product information

Product name:

Lexmark C746n, C746dn, C746dtn, C748e, C748de, C748dte

Machine type:

5026

Model(s):

310, 330, 510, 530

Edition notice

April 2012

The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:

LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time.

References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.

For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.

For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.

If you don't have access to the Internet, you can contact Lexmark by mail:

Lexmark International, Inc.

Bldg 004-2/CSC

740 New Circle Road NW

Lexington, KY 40550

USA

© 2012 Lexmark International, Inc.

All rights reserved.

Notices 256

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS

This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense.

Trademarks

Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries.

Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.

The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:

Albertus

Antique Olive

Apple-Chancery

Arial

CG Times

The Monotype Corporation plc

Monsieur Marcel OLIVE

Apple Computer, Inc.

The Monotype Corporation plc

Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of

Agfa Corporation

Chicago

Clarendon

Eurostile

Geneva

Apple Computer, Inc.

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Nebiolo

Apple Computer, Inc.

GillSans

Helvetica

The Monotype Corporation plc

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry

ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation

ITC Bookman

ITC Mona Lisa

ITC Zapf Chancery

Joanna

Marigold

Monaco

New York

International Typeface Corporation

International Typeface Corporation

International Typeface Corporation

The Monotype Corporation plc

Arthur Baker

Apple Computer, Inc.

Apple Computer, Inc.

Oxford

Palatino

Arthur Baker

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Notices

Stempel Garamond

Taffy

Times New Roman

Univers

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Agfa Corporation

The Monotype Corporation plc

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

257

AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.

The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for

USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations.

Notices 258

Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:

Director of Lexmark Technology & Services

Lexmark International, Inc.

740 West New Circle Road

Lexington, KY 40550

(859) 232–3000

Modular component notice

Wireless

‑equipped models contain the following modular component(s):

Lexmark regulatory type/model LEX-M01-003; FCC ID: IYLM01003; IC: 2376A-M01003

Licensing notices

All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the CD:\LEGAL directory of the installation software

CD.

Noise emission levels

The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

1-meter average sound pressure, dBA

Printing

Ready

55

33

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European

Union. We encourage the recycling of our products. If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the

Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local sales office phone number.

Notices 259

Product disposal

Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options.

Static sensitivity notice

This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer.

ENERGY STAR

Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.

Temperature information

Ambient temperature

Shipping and storage temperature

15.6-32.2°C (60-90°F)

-40° to 40°C (-40 to 104°F)

Laser notice

The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.

Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.

Laser advisory label

A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:

Notices 260

DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.

PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.

Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.

NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.

FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.

GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.

DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.

VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.

GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.

ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.

VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.

PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.

FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.

NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.

ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.

Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.

PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.

FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.

险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射,请避免暴露在激光光束下。

危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會

產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。

危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。

Power consumption

Product power consumption

The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

Mode

Printing

Copy

Scan

Description Power consumption

(Watts)

The product is generating hard

‑copy output from electronic inputs.

535

The product is generating hard

‑copy output from hard‑copy original documents. N/A

The product is scanning hard

‑copy documents.

N/A

Ready The product is waiting for a print job.

Sleep Mode The product is in a high

‑level energy‑saving mode.

Hibernate The product is in a low

‑level energy‑saving mode.

Off

48

6.8 (C746); 7.3 (C748)

0.55

The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned off.

0

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Notices 261

Sleep Mode

This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.

Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 30

By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 180 minutes. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.

Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.

Off mode

If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet.

Total energy usage

It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.

Industry Canada compliance statement

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard

ICES-003.

Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada

Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.

European Community (EC) directives conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.

The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium

Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Regulatory notices for wireless products

This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters, for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.

Notices 262

Exposure to radio frequency radiation

The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Industry Canada (Canada)

This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada.

To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.

The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health

Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.

The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

Industry Canada (Canada)

Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes :

(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.

Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.

En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement interdite.

Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.

Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.

L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au

Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.

Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.

Notices 263

Notice to users in the European Union

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC,

1999/5/EC, and 2005/32/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy-using products.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.

The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium

Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the

Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

AT

EL

LI

RO

Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.

The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium

Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.

BE

ES

LT

SE

BG

FI

LU

SI

CH

FR

LV

SK

CY

HR

MT

TR

CZ

HU

NL

UK

DE

IE

NO

DK

IS

PL

EE

IT

PT

Česky

Dansk

Deutsch

Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.

Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.

Notices 264

Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ

ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ

ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.

English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Español

Eesti

Suomi

Français

Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.

Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.

Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Magyar Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.

Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.

Lietuvių Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas

1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.

Malti Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.

Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.

Norsk

Polski

Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og

øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.

Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.

Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.

Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Statement of Limited Warranty

Lexmark C746n, C746dn, C746dtn, C748e, C748de, C748dte

Notices 265

Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY

This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the countryspecific warranty information that came with your product.

This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from

Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”

Limited warranty

Lexmark warrants that this product:

—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts

—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship

If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).

If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the product.

If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user.

Limited warranty service

The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed.

To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.

You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.

When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the

Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.

The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.

Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.

Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).

For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact

Lexmark on the World Wide Web at http://support.lexmark.com.

Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.

Notices 266

Extent of limited warranty

Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product.

Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:

—Modification or unauthorized attachments

—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance

—Unsuitable physical or operating environment

—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer

—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle

—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications

—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts

—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR

REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH

RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT

MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO

WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,

AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.

Limitation of liability

Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.

Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR

ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.

This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its

Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.

Additional rights

Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.

This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

Index 267

Index

Numerics

2,000

‑sheet drawer

installing 32

2,000

‑sheet high‑capacity feeder

loading 57, 99

200–201 paper jams 203

202–203 paper jams 208

24x paper jam 212

250 paper jam 213

31.xx Missing or defective [color]

cartridge 220

32.xx [Color] cartridge part number

unsupported by device 220

34 Incorrect paper size, open

[paper source] 221

35 Insufficient memory to support

Resource Save feature 221

36 Printer service required 221

37 Insufficient memory for Flash

Memory Defragment

operation 221

37 Insufficient memory to collate

job 222

37 Insufficient memory, some Held

Jobs were deleted 222

37 Insufficient memory, some held

jobs will not be restored 222

38 Memory full 222

39 Complex page, some data may

not have printed 222

51 Defective flash detected 222

52 Not enough free space in flash

memory for resources 223

53 Unformatted flash detected 223

54 Network [x] software error 223

54 Serial option [x] error 223

54 Standard network software

error 223

55 Unsupported option in slot

[x] 224

550

‑sheet drawer

installing 32

550

‑sheet specialty media drawer

installing 32

550

‑sheet tray (standard or optional)

loading 49, 91

56 Parallel port [x] disabled 224

56 Serial port [x] disabled 224

56 Standard USB port disabled 224

56 USB port [x] disabled 224

57 Configuration change, some held

jobs were not restored 225

58 Input config error 225

58 Too many disks installed 225

58 Too many flash options

installed 225

58 Too many trays attached 226

59 Incompatible tray [x] 226

61 Remove defective disk 226

62 Disk full 226

80.xx Fuser life warning 227

80.xx Fuser missing 227

80.xx Fuser near life warning 226

80.xx Replace fuser 227

82.xx Replace waste toner

bottle 227

82.xx Waste toner bottle

missing 227

82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly

full 227

83.xx Replace transfer module 228

83.xx Transfer module life

warning 228

83.xx Transfer module missing 228

83.xx Transfer module near life

warning 228

84.xx [Color] photoconductor

low 228

84.xx [color] photoconductor

missing 229

84.xx [Color] photoconductor

nearly low 228

84.xx Replace [color]

photoconductor 229

88.xx [Color] cartridge critically

low 230

88.xx [color] cartridge low 229

88.xx [color] cartridge nearly

low 229

88.xx [Color] cartridge very low 230

A

accessing the Embedded Web

Server 86

accessing the system board 16

Active NIC menu 146

adjusting brightness

Embedded Web Server 117 printer control panel 117 adjusting display brightness 117

adjusting Sleep mode 74, 116

adjusting toner darkness 65, 107

administrator settings

Embedded Web Server 71

AppleTalk menu 151

attaching cables 33

attaching the system board

cover 16

available internal options 15

avoiding paper jams 201

B

Background and Idle Screen

using 87

black

‑and‑white printing 65, 107

buttons, touch screen

using 84

C

cables

Ethernet 33

USB 33

calling customer support 254

canceling

print job, from computer 71, 113

canceling a print job

from a computer 71, 113

from the printer control

panel 70, 112

cannot open Embedded Web

Server 254

card stock

tips 125

Change [paper source] to [custom

string] 215

Change [paper source] to [custom

string] load [orientation] 215

Change [paper source] to [custom

type name] 214

Change [paper source] to [custom

type name] load [orientation] 215

Change [paper source] to [paper

size] 215

Index 268

Change [paper source] to [paper

size] load [orientation] 215

Change [paper source] to [paper

type] [paper size] 216

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load

[orientation] 216

checking an unresponsive

printer 214

checking status of parts and

supplies 72, 114

checking the status of parts and

supplies 72, 114

checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web

Server 71, 113

cleaning

exterior of the printer 198 interior of the printer 198 cleaning the printhead lenses 198

Close front door 216

confidential print jobs 68, 110

printing from a Macintosh

computer 69, 111 printing from Windows 69, 111

Confidential Print menu 160

configuration information

wireless network 35

Configure MP menu 138

configuring port settings 42

conservation settings

brightness, adjusting 117

conserving supplies 187

Eco

‑Mode 73, 115

Hibernate Mode 74, 117

Quiet Mode 73, 115

Sleep Mode 116

Sleep mode 74

conserving supplies 187

contacting customer support 254

control panel, printer 47, 82

corrupted printer hard disk 216

custom name

configuring 64, 106

Custom Names menu 144

custom paper type name

assigning 64, 105 creating 64, 105

Custom Type [x]

changing name 105

changing paper type 106

Custom Type [x] name

configuring 64 creating 64

Custom Types menu 144

D

Default Source menu 135

directory list

printing 70, 112

Disk near full. Securely clearing disk

space. 216

Disk problem 216

disk wiping 77, 120

Disk Wiping menu 160

display troubleshooting

printer display is blank 233

display, control panel 47, 82

display, printer control panel

adjusting brightness 117

disposing of printer hard

disk 76, 119

documents, printing

from Macintosh 65, 106 from Windows 65, 106

E

Eco

‑Mode setting 73, 115

Eco

‑Settings

about 88

Embedded Web Server

accessing 86

administrator settings 71, 113

checking the status of

parts 72, 114

checking the status of

supplies 72, 114

networking settings 71, 113

problem accessing 254

Embedded Web Server

Administrator's Guide

where to find 71, 79, 113, 122

emission

notices 257, 258, 261, 262, 263

encrypting the printer hard

disk 78, 121

envelopes

loading 60, 102

tips on using 124

environmental settings

conserving supplies 187

display brightness, adjusting 117

Eco

‑Mode 73, 115

Hibernate Mode 74, 117

Quiet Mode 73, 115

Sleep Mode 116

Sleep mode 74

erasing hard disk memory 77, 120

erasing non

‑volatile

memory 77, 119 erasing volatile memory 77, 119

Error reading USB drive. Remove

USB 217

Ethernet networking

Macintosh 40

Windows 40

Ethernet port 33

exporting a configuration using the Embedded Web

Server 89

exterior of the printer

cleaning 198

F

factory defaults

restoring 118

factory defaults, restoring 75

FAQ about color printing 251

FCC notices 257, 262

fiber optic

network setup 40

finding more information about the

printer 13

Finishing menu 174

firmware card

installing 20

flash drive

printing from 67, 109

Flash Drive menu 170

flash drives

supported file types 68, 110

flash memory card

installing 20

troubleshooting 235

font sample list

printing 70, 112

Forms and Favorites

setting up 88

four

‑arrow‑button printer control

panel 47

fuser

ordering 190

Index 269

G

General Settings menu 163

green settings

Eco

‑Mode 73, 115

Hibernate Mode 74, 117

Quiet Mode 73, 115

Sleep mode 74

H

held jobs 68, 110

printing from a Macintosh

computer 69, 111 printing from Windows 69, 111

Help menu 186

Hibernate Mode

using 74, 117

hiding icons on the home screen 87

home screen

buttons, understanding 83

hiding icons 87 showing icons 87

home screen buttons

understanding 83

HTML menu 184

I

icons on the home screen

hiding 87 showing 87

Image menu 185

importing a configuration using the Embedded Web

Server 89

indicator light 47, 82

Install Tray [x] 217

installing on a wireless network

using Windows 36

installing options

order of installation 31

installing printer

on wireless network 36

installing printer hard disk 26

installing printer on a network

wired networking 40

installing printer on a wireless network

using Macintosh 38

installing printer software 34 adding options 34

interior of the printer

cleaning 198

internal print server

troubleshooting 235

Internal Solutions Port

changing port settings 42

installing 22

troubleshooting 236

IPv6 menu 150

J

jams

avoiding 201

locating jam areas 202 locations 202 numbers 202

jams, avoiding cutting paper and specialty

media 127

selecting paper and specialty

media 127

jams, clearing

200–201 paper jams 203

202–203 paper jams 208

24x paper jam 212

250 paper jam 213

Job Accounting menu 178

L

labels, paper

tips 124

letterhead loading, 2,000

‑sheet high‑capacity

feeder 57, 99

loading, multipurpose feeder 123 loading, trays 123

light, indicator 47, 82

linking trays 63, 64, 105

Load [paper source] with [custom

string] 217

Load [paper source] with [custom

type name] 217

Load [paper source] with [paper

size] 218

Load [paper source] with [paper

type] [paper size] 218

Load manual feeder with [custom

string] 218

Load manual feeder with [custom

type name] 218

Load manual feeder with [paper

size] 219

Load manual feeder with [paper

type] [paper size] 219

loading

2,000

‑sheet high‑capacity

feeder 57, 99

550

‑sheet tray (standard or

optional) 91

envelopes 60, 102

letterhead in 2,000

‑sheet high

‑capacity feeder 57, 99

multipurpose feeder 60, 102

optional 550

‑sheet special media

tray 52, 94

optional 550

‑sheet tray 49

standard 550

‑sheet tray 49

transparencies 60, 102

loading letterhead

paper orientation 123

loading the optional special media

tray 52, 94

loading the optional tray 91 loading the standard tray 49, 91

lock, security 76, 118 locking the system board 76, 118

M

maintenance counter,

resetting 197

Max Speed and Max Yield

using 66, 108

memory

types installed on printer 76, 119

memory card

installing 18

troubleshooting 236

menu settings page

printing 72, 114

menus

Active NIC 146

AppleTalk 151

Confidential Print 160

Configure MP 138

Custom Names 144

Custom Types 144

Default Source 135

diagram of 132

Disk Wiping 160

Finishing 174

Flash Drive 170

General Settings 163

Help 186

HTML 184

Index

Image 185

IPv6 150

Job Accounting 178

Miscellaneous Security

Settings 159

Network [x] 146

Network Card 148

Paper Loading 142

Paper Size/Type 135

Paper Texture 139

Paper Weight 141

Parallel [x] 153

PCL Emul 182

PDF 181

PostScript 181

Quality 175

Reports 145, 148

Security Audit Log 161

Serial [x] 155

Set Date and Time 162

Setup 172

SMTP Setup menu 158

Standard Network 146

Standard USB 152

Substitute Size 139

Supplies 133

TCP/IP 149

Universal Setup 145

Utilities 180

Wireless 151

XPS 181

menus diagram 132

Miscellaneous Security Settings

menu 159

moving the printer 45, 80, 200

multipurpose feeder

loading 60, 102

N

Network [x] menu 146

Network Card menu 148

network options 15

network settings

Embedded Web Server 71

network setup page

printing 72, 114

Networking Guide

where to find 71, 113

noise emission levels 258

non

‑volatile memory 76, 119 erasing 77, 119

notices 256, 257, 258, 259, 260,

261, 262, 263

O

optional 550

‑sheet special media tray

loading 52, 94

optional special media tray

loading 52, 94

optional tray

loading 91

options

2,000

‑sheet drawer 32

550

‑sheet drawer 32

550

‑sheet specialty media

drawer 32

firmware card 20

firmware cards 15

flash memory card 20

Internal Solutions Port 22

list 15

memory card 18

memory cards 15 network 15

order of installation 31

ports 15

printer hard disk, installing 26

printer hard disk, removing 30

updating in printer driver 34

ordering

fuser 190

photoconductors 189 toner cartridges 189

transfer module 190 waste toner bottle 190

P

paper

characteristics 125

letterhead 127 preprinted forms 127 recommended print side 127 recycled 127 selecting 127

setting size 48 setting type 48

storing 128

unacceptable 126

Universal size setting 48, 90

using recycled 187

Paper changes needed 219

270 paper feed troubleshooting message remains after paper jam

is cleared 238

paper jams

avoiding 201

paper jams, clearing

200–201 paper jams 203

202–203 paper jams 208

24x paper jam 212

250 paper jam 213

Paper Loading menu 142

paper size

setting 90

Universal 145

Paper Size/Type menu 135

paper sizes

supported 128

Paper Texture menu 139

paper type

setting 90

paper types

supported by printer 130 where to load 130

Paper Weight menu 141

paper weights

supported by printer 130

Parallel [x] menu 153

parts

checking status 72, 114

checking, from printer control

panel 114

checking, using the Embedded

Web Server 72, 114

using genuine Lexmark 190

parts and supplies, status of checking, on printer control

panel 72

PCL Emul menu 182

PDF menu 181

photoconductor

replacing 194

photoconductor maintenance counter

resetting 197

photoconductors

ordering 189

port settings

configuring 42

PostScript menu 181

print job canceling from the printer control

panel 70

Index 271

canceling, from computer 71, 113

print quality

cleaning the printhead lenses 198

print quality troubleshooting

blank pages 244

characters have jagged edges 239 clipped images 239 gray background on prints 239

light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears

on prints 240

poor transparency quality 250

print irregularities 241

print is too dark 242

print is too light 243

repeating defects 245

shadow images appear on

prints 245

skewed print 246 solid black pages 246 solid color pages 246

streaked horizontal lines appear

on prints 247

streaked vertical lines 248

toner fog or background shading

on the page 248

toner rubs off 249

toner specks 250

uneven print density 251

print quality, poor avoiding by selecting paper and

specialty media 127

print troubleshooting

error reading flash drive 230 held jobs do not print 230

incorrect characters print 231

incorrect margins 240

jammed pages are not

reprinted 238

job prints from wrong tray 231 job prints on wrong paper 231

jobs do not print 232

Large jobs do not collate 231

multiple

‑language PDF files do not

print 231

paper curl 241

paper frequently jams 237

print job takes longer than

expected 233 printing slows down 233

tray linking does not work 234 unexpected page breaks 234

printer

configured models 46, 81

minimum clearances 45, 80

moving 45, 80, 200

selecting a location 45, 80

shipping 200

printer configurations 46, 81

printer control panel

factory defaults, restoring 75, 118

using 47, 82

printer control panel, virtual display using the Embedded Web

Server 71, 113

printer hard disk

disposing of 76, 119

encrypting 78, 121

installing 26

removing 30

troubleshooting 235

wiping 77, 120

printer hard disk

encryption 78, 121

printer hard disk memory

erasing 77, 120

printer information

where to find 13

printer messages

31.xx Missing or defective [color]

cartridge 220

32.xx [Color] cartridge part number unsupported by

device 220

34 Incorrect paper size, open

[paper source] 221

35 Insufficient memory to support

Resource Save feature 221

36 Printer service required 221

37 Insufficient memory for Flash

Memory Defragment

operation 221

37 Insufficient memory to collate

job 222

37 Insufficient memory, some

Held Jobs were deleted 222

37 Insufficient memory, some held

jobs will not be restored 222

38 Memory full 222

39 Complex page, some data may

not have printed 222

51 Defective flash detected 222

52 Not enough free space in flash

memory for resources 223

53 Unformatted flash

detected 223

54 Network [x] software error 223

54 Serial option [x] error 223

54 Standard network software

error 223

55 Unsupported option in slot

[x] 224

56 Parallel port [x] disabled 224

56 Serial port [x] disabled 224

56 Standard USB port

disabled 224

56 USB port [x] disabled 224

57 Configuration change, some

held jobs were not restored 225

58 Input config error 225

58 Too many disks installed 225

58 Too many flash options

installed 225

58 Too many trays attached 226

59 Incompatible tray [x] 226

61 Remove defective disk 226

62 Disk full 226

80.xx Fuser life warning 227

80.xx Fuser missing 227

80.xx Fuser near life warning 226

80.xx Replace fuser 227

82.xx Replace waste toner

bottle 227

82.xx Waste toner bottle

missing 227

82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly

full 227

83.xx Replace transfer

module 228

83.xx Transfer module life

warning 228

83.xx Transfer module

missing 228

83.xx Transfer module near life

warning 228

84.xx [Color] photoconductor

low 228

84.xx [color] photoconductor

missing 229

84.xx [Color] photoconductor

nearly low 228

84.xx Replace [color]

photoconductor 229

Index 272

88.xx [Color] cartridge critically

low 230

88.xx [color] cartridge low 229

88.xx [color] cartridge nearly

low 229

88.xx [Color] cartridge very

low 230

an error has occurred with the

USB drive 214

Change [paper source] to [custom

string] 215

Change [paper source] to [custom

string] load [orientation] 215

Change [paper source] to [custom

type name] 214

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load

[orientation] 215

Change [paper source] to [paper

size] 215

Change [paper source] to [paper

size] load [orientation] 215

Change [paper source] to [paper

type] [paper size] 216

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load

[orientation] 216

Close front door 216

Disk corrupted 216

Disk near full. Securely clearing

disk space. 216

Disk problem 216

Error reading USB drive. Remove

USB 217

Insert Tray [x] 217

Install Tray [x] 217

Load [paper source] with [custom

string] 217

Load [paper source] with [custom

type name] 217

Load [paper source] with [paper

size] 218

Load [paper source] with [paper

type] [paper size] 218

Load manual feeder with [custom

string] 218

Load manual feeder with [custom

type name] 218

Load manual feeder with [paper

size] 219

Load manual feeder with [paper

type] [paper size] 219

Paper changes needed 219

Remove packaging material, [area

name] 219

Remove paper from standard

output bin 219

Restore held jobs? 220

Some held jobs were not

restored 220

Supply needed to complete

job 220

Tray [x] paper size

unsupported 220

Unsupported disk 220

printer options troubleshooting

2,000

‑sheet drawer problems 235

cannot detect flash memory

card 235

cannot detect printer hard

disk 235 internal print server 235

Internal Solutions Port 236 memory card 236 option does not work 236

paper tray problems 237

USB/parallel interface card 237

printer problems, solving basic 214

printer setup

verifying 44

printer software

installing 34

printhead lenses

cleaning 198

printing black

‑and‑white 65, 107

canceling, from printer control

panel 112 directory list 70, 112 font sample list 70, 112

forms 106

from flash drive 67, 109

from Macintosh 65, 106 from Windows 65, 106

Max Speed and Max Yield 66, 108

menu settings page 72, 114

network setup page 72, 114

printing a directory list 112

printing a document 65, 106

printing a font sample list 112

printing a menu settings page 114

printing a network setup

page 72, 114

printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh

computer 69, 111 from Windows 69, 111

printing forms 106

printing from a flash drive 67, 109

printing in black and white 65, 107

publications

where to find 13

Q

Quality menu 175

Quiet Mode 73

Quiet mode 115

R

reattaching the system board

cover 16

recommended print side 127

recycled paper

using 127, 187

recycling

Lexmark packaging 188

Lexmark products 188 toner cartridges 188

WEEE statement 258

reducing noise 73, 115

Remote Operator Panel

setting up 89

Remove packaging material, [area

name] 219

Remove paper from standard

output bin 219

removing printer hard disk 30

repeat print jobs 68, 110

printing from a Macintosh

computer 69, 111 printing from Windows 69, 111

replacing supplies

photoconductor 194

toner cartridge 191

waster toner bottle 193

Reports menu 145, 148

reserve print jobs 68

printing from a Macintosh

computer 69, 111 printing from Windows 69, 111

resetting the maintenance

counter 197

Restore held jobs? 220

Index 273 restoring factory default

settings 118

S

safety information 11, 12

Security Audit Log menu 161

security lock 76, 118

security Web page

where to find 79, 122

selecting a location for the

printer 45, 80

Serial [x] menu 155

Set Date and Time menu 162

setting

paper size 48, 90 paper type 48, 90

TCP/IP address 149

setting the Universal paper

size 48, 90

setting up the printer on a wired network

(Macintosh) 40 on a wired network (Windows) 40

Setup menu 172

shipping the printer 200

showing icons on the home

screen 87

Showroom

about 88

Sleep Mode

adjusting 116

Sleep mode

adjusting 74

SMTP Setup menu 158

Some held jobs were not

restored 220

specialty media

recommended print side 127 selecting 127

Standard Network menu 146

standard tray

loading 49, 91

Standard USB menu 152

statement of volatility 76, 119

status of parts

checking 114

status of parts and supplies

checking 72

status of supplies

checking 114

storing

paper 128

supplies 191

storing print jobs 68, 110

Substitute Size menu 139

supplies

checking status 72, 114

checking, from printer control

panel 114

checking, using the Embedded

Web Server 72, 114

conserving 187

storing 191

using genuine Lexmark 190

using recycled paper 187

Supplies menu 133

supplies, ordering

fuser 190

photoconductors 189 toner cartridges 189

transfer module 190 waste toner bottle 190

supplies, replacing

photoconductor 194

waste toner bottle 193

Supply needed to complete job 220

supported file types 110 supported flash drives 68, 110

supported paper sizes 128

system board

accessing 16

locking 76, 118

system board cover

attaching 16 reattaching 16

T

TCP/IP menu 149

tips

card stock 125

labels, paper 124 on using envelopes 124

on using letterhead 123 on using transparencies 123

tips on using envelopes 124

tips on using letterhead 123

toner cartridge

replacing 191

toner cartridges

ordering 189

recycling 188

toner darkness

adjusting 65, 107

toner rubs off 249

touch screen

buttons, using 84

touch

‑screen printer control

panel 82

transfer module

ordering 190

transparencies

loading 60, 102, 123 tips on using 123 using 123

Tray [x] paper size

unsupported 220

trays

linking 63, 64, 105 unlinking 63, 64, 104, 105

troubleshooting an application error has

occurred 234

cannot open Embedded Web

Server 254

checking an unresponsive

printer 214

contacting customer support 254

FAQ about color printing 251

solving basic printer

problems 214

troubleshooting, display

printer display is blank 233

troubleshooting, paper feed message remains after paper jam

is cleared 238

troubleshooting, print

error reading flash drive 230 held jobs do not print 230

incorrect characters print 231

incorrect margins 240

jammed pages are not

reprinted 238

job prints from wrong tray 231 job prints on wrong paper 231

jobs do not print 232

Large jobs do not collate 231

multiple

‑language PDF files do not

print 231

paper curl 241

paper frequently jams 237

print job takes longer than

expected 233 printing slows down 233

tray linking does not work 234 unexpected page breaks 234

Index troubleshooting, print quality

blank pages 244

characters have jagged edges 239 clipped images 239 gray background on prints 239

light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears

on prints 240

poor transparency quality 250

print irregularities 241

print is too dark 242

print is too light 243

repeating defects 245

shadow images appear on

prints 245

skewed print 246 solid black pages 246 solid color pages 246

streaked horizontal lines appear

on prints 247

streaked vertical lines 248

toner fog or background shading

on the page 248

toner rubs off 249

toner specks 250

uneven print density 251

troubleshooting, printer options

2,000

‑sheet drawer problems 235

cannot detect flash memory

card 235

cannot detect printer hard

disk 235 internal print server 235

Internal Solutions Port 236 memory card 236 option does not work 236

paper tray problems 237

USB/parallel interface card 237

U

understanding

User’s Guide 13

understanding the home screen 83

Universal Paper Size

setting 90

Universal paper size 145

setting 48

Universal Setup menu 145

unlinking trays 63, 64, 104, 105

Unsupported disk 220

Unsupported USB device, please

remove 217

updating options in printer

driver 34

USB port 33

USB/parallel interface card

troubleshooting 237

User’s Guide

understanding 13

using Forms and Favorites 106

using Hibernate Mode 74, 117

using Max Speed and Max

Yield 66, 108

using recycled paper 187

using the four

‑arrow‑button printer

control panel 47

using the touch screen printer

control panel 82

using the touch

‑screen buttons 84

Utilities menu 180

V

verify print jobs 68, 110

printing from a Macintosh

computer 69, 111 printing from Windows 69, 111

verifying printer setup 44

virtual display checking, using Embedded Web

Server 71, 113

volatile memory 76, 119 erasing 77, 119

volatility

statement of 76, 119

W

waste toner bottle

ordering 190

replacing 193

wiping the printer hard disk 77, 120

wired network setup

using Macintosh 40 using Windows 40

Wireless menu 151

wireless network

configuration information 35

installation, using Macintosh 38

installation, using Windows 36

wireless network setup

in Windows 36

wireless printer setup

in Macintosh 38

X

XPS menu 181

274

advertisement

Key Features

  • Laser Colour
  • 1200 x 1200 DPI
  • A4 35 ppm
  • Duplex printing Direct printing
  • Ethernet LAN
  • LCD Built-in display
  • Maximum duty cycle: 85000 pages per month
  • Total number of input trays: 3 Total input capacity: 1200 sheets Total output capacity: 300 sheets
  • Internal memory: 512 MB 800 MHz

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents